ks4 options information - chessington community · pdf fileks4 options information 2012-2014...

48
Chessington Community College KS4 Options Information 2012-2014 Name:__________________________ Tutor Group:___________

Upload: dinhduong

Post on 04-Feb-2018

217 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Chessington Community College

KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

Name__________________________ Tutor Group___________

2|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TABLE OF CONTENTS

WELCOME FROM THE PRINCIPAL 3

KS4 CURRICULUM 4

QUALIFICATIONS INFORMATION 5

CHOOSING YOUR SUBJECTS 5

MAKING A BALANCED CHOICE 6

WHAT IF I MAKE A WRONG CHOICE 6

THE CORE CURRICULUM

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) 9

ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE) 11

MATHEMATICS (GCSE) 12

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) 13

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE 14

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT 15

THE OPTIONAL CURRICULUM

3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE) 19

ART (GCSE) 20

CATERING (GCSE) 22

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION 24

DANCE (BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS) 25

DRAMA (GCSE) 26

ETHICS (GCSE) 27

FILM STUDIES (GCSE) 28

FRENCH (GCSE) 29

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) 30

GRAPHICS (GCSE) 32

HAIRDRESSING (NVQ) 33

HISTORY (GCSE) 34

ICT (CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2) 36

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE) 37

MOTOR VEHICLE (NVQ) 38

MUSIC (GCSE) 39

MUSIC (BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE ) 40

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE) 42

SPANISH (GCSE) 43

SPORT (BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA) 44

TEXTILES (GCSE) 45

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES) 46

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS 47

Page|3 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

March 2012

Dear Students and Parents

OPTIONS 2012 - 2014

At this time in Year 9 it is important that we begin to look at the process of making choices

for the courses your sondaughter will take during Key Stage 4 The intention at Chessington

Community College is that each student will continue with the core subjects from the

National Curriculum and then be encouraged to choose further GCSE and BTEC courses that

will meet their needs and aspirations for the future

In designing our KS4 curriculum programme we have tried to take into consideration factors

which will give our students the best opportunity for individual success in their future

examinations The programme and the courses will be fully explained to the students during

their lessons Subject teachers heads of house Mr Winchcombe and Mr Clutterbuck are all

available to give students individual advice In addition each student‟s choice of courses

will be reviewed and where necessary individual interviews to discuss choices will take

place There will also be an Options Information Evening on Thursday 15th March starting at

7pm where both students and parents will have the opportunity to discuss further action

appropriate course selection with heads of faculty and subject teachers

We do hope that you will make full use of the opportunities for discussion and that you will

feel able to contact Mr Winchcombe if you wish to clarify any issue

Once the issue of courses for individual students are settled we look forward to all students

enjoying the challenges provided by Key Stage 4 courses and expect to see them working

hard to achieve the success they deserve

Yours sincerely

R Niedermaier-Reed

Principal

4|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 Curriculum

At Key Stage 4 students will study a bdquocore‟ which covers a broad and balanced range of

subjects in line with the national curriculum

Students then make 4 choices for the rest of their bdquooptional‟ curriculum

Core

EnglishEnglish Literature 2 GCSEs

Mathematics GCSE

Science 2 GCSE

Sport (BTEC) Equivalent to 2 GCSEs

Social Studies (Pastoral Education)

Optional Curriculum

Triple Science

For those students that have excelled in their KS3 Science we will be offering a third science

Teachers will assess student‟s suitability of course and will interview these students in the

Summer Term

English as an Additional Language (EAL)

Overseas students may speak understand or be literate in more than one language and

may have some experience of English but will require support to acquire fluency in English

and to access the curriculum The EAL course helps these students

Part-time studying at Kingston College

We are offering both a Motor Vehicle Level 1 course and a Hairdressing NVQ Level 1 course

Both these are taught at Kingston College on a Friday and would be equal to 2 Option

choices

Art (GCSE) Hairdressing (NVQ)

Catering (GCSE) History (GCSE)

Construction (City and Guild Certificate) ICT (Cambridge Nationals)

3D Design (GCSE) Media Studies (GCSE)

Dance (BTEC) Music (GCSE and BTEC)

Drama (GCSE) Motor Vehicle (NVQ)

Ethics (GCSE) Spanish (GCSE)

Film studies (GCSE) Sport (BTEC)

French (GCSE) Textiles (GCSE)

Geography (GCSE) Triple Science (GCSE)

Graphics (GCSE)

Page|5 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

Qualifications Information

GCSE

General Certification of Secondary Education GCSEs are taken by most school-leaving age

students They are known as Level 2 qualifications

BTEC

BTECs are work-related qualifications suitable for a wide range of students built to

accommodate the needs of employers and allow progression to university They provide a

practical real-world approach to learning without sacrificing any of the essential subject

theory and are recognised by a large number of organisations in a wide range of sectors

BTECs offer natural progression along a vocational path from and to academic

qualifications and university

Cambrige Nationals

Cambridge Nationals are an exam-free alternative to GCSEs taking a more engaging

practical approach to learning and assessment

NVQ

NVQ is work based awards in England Wales and Northern Ireland that are achieved

through assessment and training

Choosing Your Subjects

The subjects and qualifications you study over Years 10 and 11 will affect how you spend

your time during your next two years at school It could also help set you up for the career or

college course you want later on

To help you decide what to study in Years 10 and 11 start by asking yourself what you enjoy

doing and what you‟re good at You need to think about

What you‟re interested in it could be other cultures and languages writing projects

helping people being outdoors or designing things

What types of activity you enjoy most - working things out and thinking them through

practical activities or artistic options like painting drawing or performing music

What do you want to do as a career

You will then ask yourself whether your choices give you a balanced programme and

whether your choices limit your options once you have completed your Year 11 studies

It is very important that you will seek help and advice about your GCSEs Subject teachers

your Head of House and Form Tutor will be very pleased to discuss any problems with you

We hope that your parents will play an active part in advising you on these important

decisions They can either talk to Staff at the Options Evening on Thursday 15th March 2012

or if required make an appointment to see them

Please remember the following points

Do talk to students who are in Year 10 or 11 about a specific subject you might wish to

study

6|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

Do get all the information you can from this booklet and by asking questions before

deciding on your subjects We provide information about all the subjects offered for study

in Years 10 and 11 on the following pages Please read the course descriptions carefully

Try not to consider only the subjects you need but also the subjects that interest you

Try not to choose a subject just because you like (or dislike) the teacher You may have

different teacher next year

Do think about your skills and how you work and try to match these with the different

demands of the different subjects Subjects have different amount of marks awarded for

examinations and for controlled assessments Do think carefully about how you best work

when making your selection of subjects

Try not to choose a subject simply because it sounds new or unusual Make sure you

understand what is involved in taking this subject

Do NOT fill in the subject request sheet until you are happy that you have made the correct

choices for your needs and interests

Making A Balanced Choice

It is important that you continue to study a variety of courses Not only will this contribute to

your general education it will also mean that doors to a wide number of careers and further

study will remain open to you Do remember to consider the range of skills that your subjects

will provide you with

The English Baccalaureate (EBacc)

The English Baccalaureate which was introduced as a performance measure in 2010

performance table is not a new qualification It is a new certificate that will be awarded to

any student who secures a GCSE Grade C or higher in the following subject

English

Mathematics

2 Sciences (Core and Additional or 2 out of Biology Chemistry and physics)

1 Modern Foreign Language or a Classical Language

1 Humanity (History or Geography)

The subjects included are designed to ensure that all students have the opportunity to study

a broad core of subjects ensuring that doors are not closed off to them in terms of future

progression

We allow all students to opt for subjects to make up the EBacc however we do not make it

compulsory for any student It is important that you choose subjects that you enjoy and are

therefore more likely to secure a good grade in You should also consider your own talents

and aspirations for the future

What if I Make A Wrong Choice We hope this will not happen but if it does then we will interview you and if possible swap

your subject What we have found in the past is that students decide on a subject because

their friends have chosen it and after a time the student realises they don‟t like the subject

therefore do not choose a subject because your friend has chosen it

THE

CORE

CURRICULUM

Page|9 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

The skills of reading writing speaking and listening are of vital importance in many areas

Not only are they essential in many careers they also underpin successful study at all levels

and a proficiency in them can also add immeasurably to an individual‟s general quality of

life

This specification is designed to aid and assess such development and to encourage

learners to be inspired moved and changed by following a broad coherent satisfying and

worthwhile course of study It will prepare learners to make informed decisions about further

learning opportunities and career choices and to use language to participate effectively in

society and employment

Different forms of assessment are appropriate to these different skills and this is recognised in

this specification Reading and Writing are assessed through controlled assessment and in

two externally marked units Speaking and Listening are assessed in a variety of different

situations during the course

Assessment

Written Paper

Unit 1 (20) Studying written language - non-fiction texts (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)

This unit will test through structured questions the reading of two non-fiction texts Non-

fiction texts may include fact-sheets leaflets letters extracts from autobiographies

biographies diaries advertisements reports articles and digital and multi-modal texts of

various kinds from newspapers and magazines brochures and the internet Visual

material will always be included in the material used

Unit 2 (20) Using written language - information and ideas (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)

This unit will test transactional and discursive writing through two equally weighted tasks

(20 marks each) Across the two tasks students will be offered opportunities to write for a

range of audiences and purposes adapting style to form and real-life context in for

example letters articles leaflets reviews etc

10|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (30) Literary reading and creative writing (80 Raw Marks 60 UMS)

Studying written language extended literary text (15)

Students need to present one assignment which is a sustained response to an extended

text The text must either be a Shakespeare play or one chosen from the GCSE English

Literature external assessment set text lists excluding poetry

Using language creative writing (15)

Students will be required to complete ONE piece of descriptive writing and ONE piece of

narrativeexpressive writing drawn from tasks supplied by WJEC

Unit 4 (30) Spoken language (60 Raw Marks 60 UMS)

Using Language Speaking and Listening (Communicating and adapting language

interacting and responding creating and sustaining roles) (20)

Students will be required to complete at least three Speaking and Listening tasks through

the exploration of ideas texts and issues in scripted and improvised work The three tasks

will cover the following areas

1 Communicating and adapting language

2 Interacting and responding

3 Creating and sustaining roles

Studying spoken language Variations choices change in spoken language (10)

Students will be required to study an aspect of spoken language The assignment will be

a sustained response to their own or others‟ uses of spoken language presented by

recording transcript or recollection

Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an

informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama

Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students

have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English

Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can

greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead

a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading

Assessment

External Assessment

Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)

Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require

students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text

Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore

respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit

students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3

Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a

contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text

OR

Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English

IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)

EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based

on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students

will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and

a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection

Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally

assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G

(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and

tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and

can do

Tier Grades Available

Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MATHEMATICS (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four

lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one

with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both

foundation and higher papers

Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be

able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between

mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of

mathematics are included in each paper

The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a

good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves

to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are

available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand

and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but

the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made

We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory

results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to

take an additional GCSE in statistics

Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)

Exam Board AQA

There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in

September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just

learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the

world in which we live

Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science

can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics

In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of

science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should

be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to

day basis

Year 10

Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below

These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions

throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework

The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of

Year 10

Year 11

The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and

Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers

containing structured questions rather than objective tests

GCSE Science A

Biology 1 25

Chemistry 1 25

Physics 1 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

GCSE Science B

Biology 2 25

Chemistry 2 25

Physics 2 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued

Exam Board AQA

The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same

proportion of marks

Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing

course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in

order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students

regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent

preparation for A level studies

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE

(EDEXCEL)

For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more

accessible course is BTEC Science

Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined

into one course

The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is

assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well

have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final

exam

The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs

Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the

optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs

The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active

leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3

qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences

The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques

personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the

workplace

1 Fitness Testing and Training

This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training

methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately

conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national

standards

2 Practical Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one

team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their

assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve

personal performance

3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport

The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of

the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help

students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy

4 Development of Personal Fitness

This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future

Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they

can progess their fitness to higher levels

5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems

This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to

exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

THE

OPTIONAL

CURRICULUM

Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during

Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products

Course Information

Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and

techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study

within Three-Dimensional Design

making appropriate use of colour line tone texture

shape and form decoration scale and proportion

using different approaches to recording images such

as observation analysis expression and imagination

showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept

issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as

appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-

Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of

form and function

making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques

providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities

composition rhythm scale and structure

providing evidence of the use of safe working practices

In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car

and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and

skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be

able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM

machine

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is

presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is

also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks

Career Progression

Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form

Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product

Design or Architecture

20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to

take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce

work using a number of different techniques which have been listed

below

Painting and drawing

Graphics

Sculptureconstruction

Photography

Printmaking

A foundation course which gives students experience of all of

these is run during the first two terms

Painting and Drawing

The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students

regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques

they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE

examination

Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus

but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students

whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities

The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but

students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as

possible in the preparation and production of coursework

3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)

The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding

of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context

Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and

experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the

form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships

between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the

interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale

structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional

objects

Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Printmaking

Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed

image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate

Lino printing

Card printing

Monoprinting

Polystyrene sheet printing

Screen printing

Assessment

Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school

and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of

sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged

Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for

40 of the marks

Visits

Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where

the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies

Career Progression

Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile

Designer Model Maker etc

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 2: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

2|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TABLE OF CONTENTS

WELCOME FROM THE PRINCIPAL 3

KS4 CURRICULUM 4

QUALIFICATIONS INFORMATION 5

CHOOSING YOUR SUBJECTS 5

MAKING A BALANCED CHOICE 6

WHAT IF I MAKE A WRONG CHOICE 6

THE CORE CURRICULUM

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) 9

ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE) 11

MATHEMATICS (GCSE) 12

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) 13

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE 14

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT 15

THE OPTIONAL CURRICULUM

3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE) 19

ART (GCSE) 20

CATERING (GCSE) 22

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION 24

DANCE (BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS) 25

DRAMA (GCSE) 26

ETHICS (GCSE) 27

FILM STUDIES (GCSE) 28

FRENCH (GCSE) 29

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) 30

GRAPHICS (GCSE) 32

HAIRDRESSING (NVQ) 33

HISTORY (GCSE) 34

ICT (CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2) 36

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE) 37

MOTOR VEHICLE (NVQ) 38

MUSIC (GCSE) 39

MUSIC (BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE ) 40

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE) 42

SPANISH (GCSE) 43

SPORT (BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA) 44

TEXTILES (GCSE) 45

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES) 46

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS 47

Page|3 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

March 2012

Dear Students and Parents

OPTIONS 2012 - 2014

At this time in Year 9 it is important that we begin to look at the process of making choices

for the courses your sondaughter will take during Key Stage 4 The intention at Chessington

Community College is that each student will continue with the core subjects from the

National Curriculum and then be encouraged to choose further GCSE and BTEC courses that

will meet their needs and aspirations for the future

In designing our KS4 curriculum programme we have tried to take into consideration factors

which will give our students the best opportunity for individual success in their future

examinations The programme and the courses will be fully explained to the students during

their lessons Subject teachers heads of house Mr Winchcombe and Mr Clutterbuck are all

available to give students individual advice In addition each student‟s choice of courses

will be reviewed and where necessary individual interviews to discuss choices will take

place There will also be an Options Information Evening on Thursday 15th March starting at

7pm where both students and parents will have the opportunity to discuss further action

appropriate course selection with heads of faculty and subject teachers

We do hope that you will make full use of the opportunities for discussion and that you will

feel able to contact Mr Winchcombe if you wish to clarify any issue

Once the issue of courses for individual students are settled we look forward to all students

enjoying the challenges provided by Key Stage 4 courses and expect to see them working

hard to achieve the success they deserve

Yours sincerely

R Niedermaier-Reed

Principal

4|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 Curriculum

At Key Stage 4 students will study a bdquocore‟ which covers a broad and balanced range of

subjects in line with the national curriculum

Students then make 4 choices for the rest of their bdquooptional‟ curriculum

Core

EnglishEnglish Literature 2 GCSEs

Mathematics GCSE

Science 2 GCSE

Sport (BTEC) Equivalent to 2 GCSEs

Social Studies (Pastoral Education)

Optional Curriculum

Triple Science

For those students that have excelled in their KS3 Science we will be offering a third science

Teachers will assess student‟s suitability of course and will interview these students in the

Summer Term

English as an Additional Language (EAL)

Overseas students may speak understand or be literate in more than one language and

may have some experience of English but will require support to acquire fluency in English

and to access the curriculum The EAL course helps these students

Part-time studying at Kingston College

We are offering both a Motor Vehicle Level 1 course and a Hairdressing NVQ Level 1 course

Both these are taught at Kingston College on a Friday and would be equal to 2 Option

choices

Art (GCSE) Hairdressing (NVQ)

Catering (GCSE) History (GCSE)

Construction (City and Guild Certificate) ICT (Cambridge Nationals)

3D Design (GCSE) Media Studies (GCSE)

Dance (BTEC) Music (GCSE and BTEC)

Drama (GCSE) Motor Vehicle (NVQ)

Ethics (GCSE) Spanish (GCSE)

Film studies (GCSE) Sport (BTEC)

French (GCSE) Textiles (GCSE)

Geography (GCSE) Triple Science (GCSE)

Graphics (GCSE)

Page|5 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

Qualifications Information

GCSE

General Certification of Secondary Education GCSEs are taken by most school-leaving age

students They are known as Level 2 qualifications

BTEC

BTECs are work-related qualifications suitable for a wide range of students built to

accommodate the needs of employers and allow progression to university They provide a

practical real-world approach to learning without sacrificing any of the essential subject

theory and are recognised by a large number of organisations in a wide range of sectors

BTECs offer natural progression along a vocational path from and to academic

qualifications and university

Cambrige Nationals

Cambridge Nationals are an exam-free alternative to GCSEs taking a more engaging

practical approach to learning and assessment

NVQ

NVQ is work based awards in England Wales and Northern Ireland that are achieved

through assessment and training

Choosing Your Subjects

The subjects and qualifications you study over Years 10 and 11 will affect how you spend

your time during your next two years at school It could also help set you up for the career or

college course you want later on

To help you decide what to study in Years 10 and 11 start by asking yourself what you enjoy

doing and what you‟re good at You need to think about

What you‟re interested in it could be other cultures and languages writing projects

helping people being outdoors or designing things

What types of activity you enjoy most - working things out and thinking them through

practical activities or artistic options like painting drawing or performing music

What do you want to do as a career

You will then ask yourself whether your choices give you a balanced programme and

whether your choices limit your options once you have completed your Year 11 studies

It is very important that you will seek help and advice about your GCSEs Subject teachers

your Head of House and Form Tutor will be very pleased to discuss any problems with you

We hope that your parents will play an active part in advising you on these important

decisions They can either talk to Staff at the Options Evening on Thursday 15th March 2012

or if required make an appointment to see them

Please remember the following points

Do talk to students who are in Year 10 or 11 about a specific subject you might wish to

study

6|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

Do get all the information you can from this booklet and by asking questions before

deciding on your subjects We provide information about all the subjects offered for study

in Years 10 and 11 on the following pages Please read the course descriptions carefully

Try not to consider only the subjects you need but also the subjects that interest you

Try not to choose a subject just because you like (or dislike) the teacher You may have

different teacher next year

Do think about your skills and how you work and try to match these with the different

demands of the different subjects Subjects have different amount of marks awarded for

examinations and for controlled assessments Do think carefully about how you best work

when making your selection of subjects

Try not to choose a subject simply because it sounds new or unusual Make sure you

understand what is involved in taking this subject

Do NOT fill in the subject request sheet until you are happy that you have made the correct

choices for your needs and interests

Making A Balanced Choice

It is important that you continue to study a variety of courses Not only will this contribute to

your general education it will also mean that doors to a wide number of careers and further

study will remain open to you Do remember to consider the range of skills that your subjects

will provide you with

The English Baccalaureate (EBacc)

The English Baccalaureate which was introduced as a performance measure in 2010

performance table is not a new qualification It is a new certificate that will be awarded to

any student who secures a GCSE Grade C or higher in the following subject

English

Mathematics

2 Sciences (Core and Additional or 2 out of Biology Chemistry and physics)

1 Modern Foreign Language or a Classical Language

1 Humanity (History or Geography)

The subjects included are designed to ensure that all students have the opportunity to study

a broad core of subjects ensuring that doors are not closed off to them in terms of future

progression

We allow all students to opt for subjects to make up the EBacc however we do not make it

compulsory for any student It is important that you choose subjects that you enjoy and are

therefore more likely to secure a good grade in You should also consider your own talents

and aspirations for the future

What if I Make A Wrong Choice We hope this will not happen but if it does then we will interview you and if possible swap

your subject What we have found in the past is that students decide on a subject because

their friends have chosen it and after a time the student realises they don‟t like the subject

therefore do not choose a subject because your friend has chosen it

THE

CORE

CURRICULUM

Page|9 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

The skills of reading writing speaking and listening are of vital importance in many areas

Not only are they essential in many careers they also underpin successful study at all levels

and a proficiency in them can also add immeasurably to an individual‟s general quality of

life

This specification is designed to aid and assess such development and to encourage

learners to be inspired moved and changed by following a broad coherent satisfying and

worthwhile course of study It will prepare learners to make informed decisions about further

learning opportunities and career choices and to use language to participate effectively in

society and employment

Different forms of assessment are appropriate to these different skills and this is recognised in

this specification Reading and Writing are assessed through controlled assessment and in

two externally marked units Speaking and Listening are assessed in a variety of different

situations during the course

Assessment

Written Paper

Unit 1 (20) Studying written language - non-fiction texts (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)

This unit will test through structured questions the reading of two non-fiction texts Non-

fiction texts may include fact-sheets leaflets letters extracts from autobiographies

biographies diaries advertisements reports articles and digital and multi-modal texts of

various kinds from newspapers and magazines brochures and the internet Visual

material will always be included in the material used

Unit 2 (20) Using written language - information and ideas (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)

This unit will test transactional and discursive writing through two equally weighted tasks

(20 marks each) Across the two tasks students will be offered opportunities to write for a

range of audiences and purposes adapting style to form and real-life context in for

example letters articles leaflets reviews etc

10|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (30) Literary reading and creative writing (80 Raw Marks 60 UMS)

Studying written language extended literary text (15)

Students need to present one assignment which is a sustained response to an extended

text The text must either be a Shakespeare play or one chosen from the GCSE English

Literature external assessment set text lists excluding poetry

Using language creative writing (15)

Students will be required to complete ONE piece of descriptive writing and ONE piece of

narrativeexpressive writing drawn from tasks supplied by WJEC

Unit 4 (30) Spoken language (60 Raw Marks 60 UMS)

Using Language Speaking and Listening (Communicating and adapting language

interacting and responding creating and sustaining roles) (20)

Students will be required to complete at least three Speaking and Listening tasks through

the exploration of ideas texts and issues in scripted and improvised work The three tasks

will cover the following areas

1 Communicating and adapting language

2 Interacting and responding

3 Creating and sustaining roles

Studying spoken language Variations choices change in spoken language (10)

Students will be required to study an aspect of spoken language The assignment will be

a sustained response to their own or others‟ uses of spoken language presented by

recording transcript or recollection

Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an

informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama

Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students

have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English

Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can

greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead

a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading

Assessment

External Assessment

Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)

Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require

students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text

Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore

respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit

students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3

Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a

contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text

OR

Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English

IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)

EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based

on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students

will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and

a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection

Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally

assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G

(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and

tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and

can do

Tier Grades Available

Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MATHEMATICS (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four

lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one

with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both

foundation and higher papers

Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be

able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between

mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of

mathematics are included in each paper

The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a

good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves

to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are

available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand

and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but

the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made

We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory

results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to

take an additional GCSE in statistics

Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)

Exam Board AQA

There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in

September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just

learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the

world in which we live

Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science

can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics

In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of

science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should

be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to

day basis

Year 10

Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below

These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions

throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework

The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of

Year 10

Year 11

The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and

Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers

containing structured questions rather than objective tests

GCSE Science A

Biology 1 25

Chemistry 1 25

Physics 1 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

GCSE Science B

Biology 2 25

Chemistry 2 25

Physics 2 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued

Exam Board AQA

The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same

proportion of marks

Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing

course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in

order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students

regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent

preparation for A level studies

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE

(EDEXCEL)

For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more

accessible course is BTEC Science

Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined

into one course

The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is

assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well

have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final

exam

The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs

Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the

optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs

The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active

leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3

qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences

The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques

personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the

workplace

1 Fitness Testing and Training

This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training

methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately

conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national

standards

2 Practical Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one

team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their

assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve

personal performance

3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport

The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of

the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help

students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy

4 Development of Personal Fitness

This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future

Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they

can progess their fitness to higher levels

5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems

This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to

exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

THE

OPTIONAL

CURRICULUM

Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during

Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products

Course Information

Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and

techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study

within Three-Dimensional Design

making appropriate use of colour line tone texture

shape and form decoration scale and proportion

using different approaches to recording images such

as observation analysis expression and imagination

showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept

issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as

appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-

Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of

form and function

making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques

providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities

composition rhythm scale and structure

providing evidence of the use of safe working practices

In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car

and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and

skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be

able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM

machine

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is

presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is

also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks

Career Progression

Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form

Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product

Design or Architecture

20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to

take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce

work using a number of different techniques which have been listed

below

Painting and drawing

Graphics

Sculptureconstruction

Photography

Printmaking

A foundation course which gives students experience of all of

these is run during the first two terms

Painting and Drawing

The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students

regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques

they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE

examination

Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus

but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students

whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities

The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but

students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as

possible in the preparation and production of coursework

3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)

The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding

of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context

Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and

experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the

form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships

between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the

interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale

structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional

objects

Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Printmaking

Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed

image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate

Lino printing

Card printing

Monoprinting

Polystyrene sheet printing

Screen printing

Assessment

Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school

and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of

sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged

Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for

40 of the marks

Visits

Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where

the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies

Career Progression

Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile

Designer Model Maker etc

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 3: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|3 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

March 2012

Dear Students and Parents

OPTIONS 2012 - 2014

At this time in Year 9 it is important that we begin to look at the process of making choices

for the courses your sondaughter will take during Key Stage 4 The intention at Chessington

Community College is that each student will continue with the core subjects from the

National Curriculum and then be encouraged to choose further GCSE and BTEC courses that

will meet their needs and aspirations for the future

In designing our KS4 curriculum programme we have tried to take into consideration factors

which will give our students the best opportunity for individual success in their future

examinations The programme and the courses will be fully explained to the students during

their lessons Subject teachers heads of house Mr Winchcombe and Mr Clutterbuck are all

available to give students individual advice In addition each student‟s choice of courses

will be reviewed and where necessary individual interviews to discuss choices will take

place There will also be an Options Information Evening on Thursday 15th March starting at

7pm where both students and parents will have the opportunity to discuss further action

appropriate course selection with heads of faculty and subject teachers

We do hope that you will make full use of the opportunities for discussion and that you will

feel able to contact Mr Winchcombe if you wish to clarify any issue

Once the issue of courses for individual students are settled we look forward to all students

enjoying the challenges provided by Key Stage 4 courses and expect to see them working

hard to achieve the success they deserve

Yours sincerely

R Niedermaier-Reed

Principal

4|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 Curriculum

At Key Stage 4 students will study a bdquocore‟ which covers a broad and balanced range of

subjects in line with the national curriculum

Students then make 4 choices for the rest of their bdquooptional‟ curriculum

Core

EnglishEnglish Literature 2 GCSEs

Mathematics GCSE

Science 2 GCSE

Sport (BTEC) Equivalent to 2 GCSEs

Social Studies (Pastoral Education)

Optional Curriculum

Triple Science

For those students that have excelled in their KS3 Science we will be offering a third science

Teachers will assess student‟s suitability of course and will interview these students in the

Summer Term

English as an Additional Language (EAL)

Overseas students may speak understand or be literate in more than one language and

may have some experience of English but will require support to acquire fluency in English

and to access the curriculum The EAL course helps these students

Part-time studying at Kingston College

We are offering both a Motor Vehicle Level 1 course and a Hairdressing NVQ Level 1 course

Both these are taught at Kingston College on a Friday and would be equal to 2 Option

choices

Art (GCSE) Hairdressing (NVQ)

Catering (GCSE) History (GCSE)

Construction (City and Guild Certificate) ICT (Cambridge Nationals)

3D Design (GCSE) Media Studies (GCSE)

Dance (BTEC) Music (GCSE and BTEC)

Drama (GCSE) Motor Vehicle (NVQ)

Ethics (GCSE) Spanish (GCSE)

Film studies (GCSE) Sport (BTEC)

French (GCSE) Textiles (GCSE)

Geography (GCSE) Triple Science (GCSE)

Graphics (GCSE)

Page|5 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

Qualifications Information

GCSE

General Certification of Secondary Education GCSEs are taken by most school-leaving age

students They are known as Level 2 qualifications

BTEC

BTECs are work-related qualifications suitable for a wide range of students built to

accommodate the needs of employers and allow progression to university They provide a

practical real-world approach to learning without sacrificing any of the essential subject

theory and are recognised by a large number of organisations in a wide range of sectors

BTECs offer natural progression along a vocational path from and to academic

qualifications and university

Cambrige Nationals

Cambridge Nationals are an exam-free alternative to GCSEs taking a more engaging

practical approach to learning and assessment

NVQ

NVQ is work based awards in England Wales and Northern Ireland that are achieved

through assessment and training

Choosing Your Subjects

The subjects and qualifications you study over Years 10 and 11 will affect how you spend

your time during your next two years at school It could also help set you up for the career or

college course you want later on

To help you decide what to study in Years 10 and 11 start by asking yourself what you enjoy

doing and what you‟re good at You need to think about

What you‟re interested in it could be other cultures and languages writing projects

helping people being outdoors or designing things

What types of activity you enjoy most - working things out and thinking them through

practical activities or artistic options like painting drawing or performing music

What do you want to do as a career

You will then ask yourself whether your choices give you a balanced programme and

whether your choices limit your options once you have completed your Year 11 studies

It is very important that you will seek help and advice about your GCSEs Subject teachers

your Head of House and Form Tutor will be very pleased to discuss any problems with you

We hope that your parents will play an active part in advising you on these important

decisions They can either talk to Staff at the Options Evening on Thursday 15th March 2012

or if required make an appointment to see them

Please remember the following points

Do talk to students who are in Year 10 or 11 about a specific subject you might wish to

study

6|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

Do get all the information you can from this booklet and by asking questions before

deciding on your subjects We provide information about all the subjects offered for study

in Years 10 and 11 on the following pages Please read the course descriptions carefully

Try not to consider only the subjects you need but also the subjects that interest you

Try not to choose a subject just because you like (or dislike) the teacher You may have

different teacher next year

Do think about your skills and how you work and try to match these with the different

demands of the different subjects Subjects have different amount of marks awarded for

examinations and for controlled assessments Do think carefully about how you best work

when making your selection of subjects

Try not to choose a subject simply because it sounds new or unusual Make sure you

understand what is involved in taking this subject

Do NOT fill in the subject request sheet until you are happy that you have made the correct

choices for your needs and interests

Making A Balanced Choice

It is important that you continue to study a variety of courses Not only will this contribute to

your general education it will also mean that doors to a wide number of careers and further

study will remain open to you Do remember to consider the range of skills that your subjects

will provide you with

The English Baccalaureate (EBacc)

The English Baccalaureate which was introduced as a performance measure in 2010

performance table is not a new qualification It is a new certificate that will be awarded to

any student who secures a GCSE Grade C or higher in the following subject

English

Mathematics

2 Sciences (Core and Additional or 2 out of Biology Chemistry and physics)

1 Modern Foreign Language or a Classical Language

1 Humanity (History or Geography)

The subjects included are designed to ensure that all students have the opportunity to study

a broad core of subjects ensuring that doors are not closed off to them in terms of future

progression

We allow all students to opt for subjects to make up the EBacc however we do not make it

compulsory for any student It is important that you choose subjects that you enjoy and are

therefore more likely to secure a good grade in You should also consider your own talents

and aspirations for the future

What if I Make A Wrong Choice We hope this will not happen but if it does then we will interview you and if possible swap

your subject What we have found in the past is that students decide on a subject because

their friends have chosen it and after a time the student realises they don‟t like the subject

therefore do not choose a subject because your friend has chosen it

THE

CORE

CURRICULUM

Page|9 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

The skills of reading writing speaking and listening are of vital importance in many areas

Not only are they essential in many careers they also underpin successful study at all levels

and a proficiency in them can also add immeasurably to an individual‟s general quality of

life

This specification is designed to aid and assess such development and to encourage

learners to be inspired moved and changed by following a broad coherent satisfying and

worthwhile course of study It will prepare learners to make informed decisions about further

learning opportunities and career choices and to use language to participate effectively in

society and employment

Different forms of assessment are appropriate to these different skills and this is recognised in

this specification Reading and Writing are assessed through controlled assessment and in

two externally marked units Speaking and Listening are assessed in a variety of different

situations during the course

Assessment

Written Paper

Unit 1 (20) Studying written language - non-fiction texts (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)

This unit will test through structured questions the reading of two non-fiction texts Non-

fiction texts may include fact-sheets leaflets letters extracts from autobiographies

biographies diaries advertisements reports articles and digital and multi-modal texts of

various kinds from newspapers and magazines brochures and the internet Visual

material will always be included in the material used

Unit 2 (20) Using written language - information and ideas (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)

This unit will test transactional and discursive writing through two equally weighted tasks

(20 marks each) Across the two tasks students will be offered opportunities to write for a

range of audiences and purposes adapting style to form and real-life context in for

example letters articles leaflets reviews etc

10|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (30) Literary reading and creative writing (80 Raw Marks 60 UMS)

Studying written language extended literary text (15)

Students need to present one assignment which is a sustained response to an extended

text The text must either be a Shakespeare play or one chosen from the GCSE English

Literature external assessment set text lists excluding poetry

Using language creative writing (15)

Students will be required to complete ONE piece of descriptive writing and ONE piece of

narrativeexpressive writing drawn from tasks supplied by WJEC

Unit 4 (30) Spoken language (60 Raw Marks 60 UMS)

Using Language Speaking and Listening (Communicating and adapting language

interacting and responding creating and sustaining roles) (20)

Students will be required to complete at least three Speaking and Listening tasks through

the exploration of ideas texts and issues in scripted and improvised work The three tasks

will cover the following areas

1 Communicating and adapting language

2 Interacting and responding

3 Creating and sustaining roles

Studying spoken language Variations choices change in spoken language (10)

Students will be required to study an aspect of spoken language The assignment will be

a sustained response to their own or others‟ uses of spoken language presented by

recording transcript or recollection

Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an

informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama

Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students

have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English

Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can

greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead

a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading

Assessment

External Assessment

Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)

Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require

students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text

Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore

respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit

students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3

Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a

contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text

OR

Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English

IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)

EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based

on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students

will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and

a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection

Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally

assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G

(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and

tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and

can do

Tier Grades Available

Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MATHEMATICS (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four

lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one

with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both

foundation and higher papers

Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be

able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between

mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of

mathematics are included in each paper

The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a

good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves

to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are

available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand

and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but

the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made

We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory

results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to

take an additional GCSE in statistics

Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)

Exam Board AQA

There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in

September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just

learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the

world in which we live

Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science

can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics

In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of

science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should

be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to

day basis

Year 10

Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below

These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions

throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework

The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of

Year 10

Year 11

The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and

Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers

containing structured questions rather than objective tests

GCSE Science A

Biology 1 25

Chemistry 1 25

Physics 1 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

GCSE Science B

Biology 2 25

Chemistry 2 25

Physics 2 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued

Exam Board AQA

The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same

proportion of marks

Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing

course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in

order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students

regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent

preparation for A level studies

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE

(EDEXCEL)

For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more

accessible course is BTEC Science

Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined

into one course

The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is

assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well

have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final

exam

The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs

Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the

optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs

The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active

leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3

qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences

The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques

personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the

workplace

1 Fitness Testing and Training

This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training

methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately

conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national

standards

2 Practical Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one

team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their

assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve

personal performance

3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport

The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of

the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help

students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy

4 Development of Personal Fitness

This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future

Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they

can progess their fitness to higher levels

5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems

This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to

exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

THE

OPTIONAL

CURRICULUM

Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during

Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products

Course Information

Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and

techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study

within Three-Dimensional Design

making appropriate use of colour line tone texture

shape and form decoration scale and proportion

using different approaches to recording images such

as observation analysis expression and imagination

showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept

issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as

appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-

Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of

form and function

making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques

providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities

composition rhythm scale and structure

providing evidence of the use of safe working practices

In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car

and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and

skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be

able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM

machine

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is

presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is

also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks

Career Progression

Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form

Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product

Design or Architecture

20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to

take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce

work using a number of different techniques which have been listed

below

Painting and drawing

Graphics

Sculptureconstruction

Photography

Printmaking

A foundation course which gives students experience of all of

these is run during the first two terms

Painting and Drawing

The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students

regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques

they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE

examination

Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus

but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students

whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities

The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but

students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as

possible in the preparation and production of coursework

3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)

The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding

of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context

Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and

experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the

form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships

between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the

interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale

structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional

objects

Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Printmaking

Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed

image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate

Lino printing

Card printing

Monoprinting

Polystyrene sheet printing

Screen printing

Assessment

Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school

and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of

sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged

Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for

40 of the marks

Visits

Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where

the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies

Career Progression

Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile

Designer Model Maker etc

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 4: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

4|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 Curriculum

At Key Stage 4 students will study a bdquocore‟ which covers a broad and balanced range of

subjects in line with the national curriculum

Students then make 4 choices for the rest of their bdquooptional‟ curriculum

Core

EnglishEnglish Literature 2 GCSEs

Mathematics GCSE

Science 2 GCSE

Sport (BTEC) Equivalent to 2 GCSEs

Social Studies (Pastoral Education)

Optional Curriculum

Triple Science

For those students that have excelled in their KS3 Science we will be offering a third science

Teachers will assess student‟s suitability of course and will interview these students in the

Summer Term

English as an Additional Language (EAL)

Overseas students may speak understand or be literate in more than one language and

may have some experience of English but will require support to acquire fluency in English

and to access the curriculum The EAL course helps these students

Part-time studying at Kingston College

We are offering both a Motor Vehicle Level 1 course and a Hairdressing NVQ Level 1 course

Both these are taught at Kingston College on a Friday and would be equal to 2 Option

choices

Art (GCSE) Hairdressing (NVQ)

Catering (GCSE) History (GCSE)

Construction (City and Guild Certificate) ICT (Cambridge Nationals)

3D Design (GCSE) Media Studies (GCSE)

Dance (BTEC) Music (GCSE and BTEC)

Drama (GCSE) Motor Vehicle (NVQ)

Ethics (GCSE) Spanish (GCSE)

Film studies (GCSE) Sport (BTEC)

French (GCSE) Textiles (GCSE)

Geography (GCSE) Triple Science (GCSE)

Graphics (GCSE)

Page|5 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

Qualifications Information

GCSE

General Certification of Secondary Education GCSEs are taken by most school-leaving age

students They are known as Level 2 qualifications

BTEC

BTECs are work-related qualifications suitable for a wide range of students built to

accommodate the needs of employers and allow progression to university They provide a

practical real-world approach to learning without sacrificing any of the essential subject

theory and are recognised by a large number of organisations in a wide range of sectors

BTECs offer natural progression along a vocational path from and to academic

qualifications and university

Cambrige Nationals

Cambridge Nationals are an exam-free alternative to GCSEs taking a more engaging

practical approach to learning and assessment

NVQ

NVQ is work based awards in England Wales and Northern Ireland that are achieved

through assessment and training

Choosing Your Subjects

The subjects and qualifications you study over Years 10 and 11 will affect how you spend

your time during your next two years at school It could also help set you up for the career or

college course you want later on

To help you decide what to study in Years 10 and 11 start by asking yourself what you enjoy

doing and what you‟re good at You need to think about

What you‟re interested in it could be other cultures and languages writing projects

helping people being outdoors or designing things

What types of activity you enjoy most - working things out and thinking them through

practical activities or artistic options like painting drawing or performing music

What do you want to do as a career

You will then ask yourself whether your choices give you a balanced programme and

whether your choices limit your options once you have completed your Year 11 studies

It is very important that you will seek help and advice about your GCSEs Subject teachers

your Head of House and Form Tutor will be very pleased to discuss any problems with you

We hope that your parents will play an active part in advising you on these important

decisions They can either talk to Staff at the Options Evening on Thursday 15th March 2012

or if required make an appointment to see them

Please remember the following points

Do talk to students who are in Year 10 or 11 about a specific subject you might wish to

study

6|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

Do get all the information you can from this booklet and by asking questions before

deciding on your subjects We provide information about all the subjects offered for study

in Years 10 and 11 on the following pages Please read the course descriptions carefully

Try not to consider only the subjects you need but also the subjects that interest you

Try not to choose a subject just because you like (or dislike) the teacher You may have

different teacher next year

Do think about your skills and how you work and try to match these with the different

demands of the different subjects Subjects have different amount of marks awarded for

examinations and for controlled assessments Do think carefully about how you best work

when making your selection of subjects

Try not to choose a subject simply because it sounds new or unusual Make sure you

understand what is involved in taking this subject

Do NOT fill in the subject request sheet until you are happy that you have made the correct

choices for your needs and interests

Making A Balanced Choice

It is important that you continue to study a variety of courses Not only will this contribute to

your general education it will also mean that doors to a wide number of careers and further

study will remain open to you Do remember to consider the range of skills that your subjects

will provide you with

The English Baccalaureate (EBacc)

The English Baccalaureate which was introduced as a performance measure in 2010

performance table is not a new qualification It is a new certificate that will be awarded to

any student who secures a GCSE Grade C or higher in the following subject

English

Mathematics

2 Sciences (Core and Additional or 2 out of Biology Chemistry and physics)

1 Modern Foreign Language or a Classical Language

1 Humanity (History or Geography)

The subjects included are designed to ensure that all students have the opportunity to study

a broad core of subjects ensuring that doors are not closed off to them in terms of future

progression

We allow all students to opt for subjects to make up the EBacc however we do not make it

compulsory for any student It is important that you choose subjects that you enjoy and are

therefore more likely to secure a good grade in You should also consider your own talents

and aspirations for the future

What if I Make A Wrong Choice We hope this will not happen but if it does then we will interview you and if possible swap

your subject What we have found in the past is that students decide on a subject because

their friends have chosen it and after a time the student realises they don‟t like the subject

therefore do not choose a subject because your friend has chosen it

THE

CORE

CURRICULUM

Page|9 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

The skills of reading writing speaking and listening are of vital importance in many areas

Not only are they essential in many careers they also underpin successful study at all levels

and a proficiency in them can also add immeasurably to an individual‟s general quality of

life

This specification is designed to aid and assess such development and to encourage

learners to be inspired moved and changed by following a broad coherent satisfying and

worthwhile course of study It will prepare learners to make informed decisions about further

learning opportunities and career choices and to use language to participate effectively in

society and employment

Different forms of assessment are appropriate to these different skills and this is recognised in

this specification Reading and Writing are assessed through controlled assessment and in

two externally marked units Speaking and Listening are assessed in a variety of different

situations during the course

Assessment

Written Paper

Unit 1 (20) Studying written language - non-fiction texts (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)

This unit will test through structured questions the reading of two non-fiction texts Non-

fiction texts may include fact-sheets leaflets letters extracts from autobiographies

biographies diaries advertisements reports articles and digital and multi-modal texts of

various kinds from newspapers and magazines brochures and the internet Visual

material will always be included in the material used

Unit 2 (20) Using written language - information and ideas (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)

This unit will test transactional and discursive writing through two equally weighted tasks

(20 marks each) Across the two tasks students will be offered opportunities to write for a

range of audiences and purposes adapting style to form and real-life context in for

example letters articles leaflets reviews etc

10|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (30) Literary reading and creative writing (80 Raw Marks 60 UMS)

Studying written language extended literary text (15)

Students need to present one assignment which is a sustained response to an extended

text The text must either be a Shakespeare play or one chosen from the GCSE English

Literature external assessment set text lists excluding poetry

Using language creative writing (15)

Students will be required to complete ONE piece of descriptive writing and ONE piece of

narrativeexpressive writing drawn from tasks supplied by WJEC

Unit 4 (30) Spoken language (60 Raw Marks 60 UMS)

Using Language Speaking and Listening (Communicating and adapting language

interacting and responding creating and sustaining roles) (20)

Students will be required to complete at least three Speaking and Listening tasks through

the exploration of ideas texts and issues in scripted and improvised work The three tasks

will cover the following areas

1 Communicating and adapting language

2 Interacting and responding

3 Creating and sustaining roles

Studying spoken language Variations choices change in spoken language (10)

Students will be required to study an aspect of spoken language The assignment will be

a sustained response to their own or others‟ uses of spoken language presented by

recording transcript or recollection

Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an

informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama

Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students

have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English

Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can

greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead

a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading

Assessment

External Assessment

Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)

Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require

students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text

Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore

respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit

students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3

Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a

contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text

OR

Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English

IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)

EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based

on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students

will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and

a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection

Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally

assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G

(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and

tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and

can do

Tier Grades Available

Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MATHEMATICS (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four

lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one

with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both

foundation and higher papers

Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be

able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between

mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of

mathematics are included in each paper

The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a

good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves

to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are

available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand

and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but

the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made

We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory

results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to

take an additional GCSE in statistics

Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)

Exam Board AQA

There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in

September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just

learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the

world in which we live

Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science

can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics

In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of

science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should

be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to

day basis

Year 10

Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below

These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions

throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework

The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of

Year 10

Year 11

The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and

Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers

containing structured questions rather than objective tests

GCSE Science A

Biology 1 25

Chemistry 1 25

Physics 1 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

GCSE Science B

Biology 2 25

Chemistry 2 25

Physics 2 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued

Exam Board AQA

The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same

proportion of marks

Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing

course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in

order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students

regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent

preparation for A level studies

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE

(EDEXCEL)

For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more

accessible course is BTEC Science

Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined

into one course

The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is

assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well

have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final

exam

The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs

Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the

optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs

The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active

leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3

qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences

The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques

personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the

workplace

1 Fitness Testing and Training

This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training

methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately

conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national

standards

2 Practical Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one

team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their

assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve

personal performance

3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport

The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of

the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help

students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy

4 Development of Personal Fitness

This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future

Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they

can progess their fitness to higher levels

5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems

This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to

exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

THE

OPTIONAL

CURRICULUM

Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during

Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products

Course Information

Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and

techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study

within Three-Dimensional Design

making appropriate use of colour line tone texture

shape and form decoration scale and proportion

using different approaches to recording images such

as observation analysis expression and imagination

showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept

issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as

appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-

Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of

form and function

making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques

providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities

composition rhythm scale and structure

providing evidence of the use of safe working practices

In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car

and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and

skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be

able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM

machine

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is

presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is

also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks

Career Progression

Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form

Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product

Design or Architecture

20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to

take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce

work using a number of different techniques which have been listed

below

Painting and drawing

Graphics

Sculptureconstruction

Photography

Printmaking

A foundation course which gives students experience of all of

these is run during the first two terms

Painting and Drawing

The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students

regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques

they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE

examination

Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus

but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students

whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities

The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but

students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as

possible in the preparation and production of coursework

3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)

The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding

of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context

Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and

experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the

form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships

between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the

interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale

structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional

objects

Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Printmaking

Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed

image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate

Lino printing

Card printing

Monoprinting

Polystyrene sheet printing

Screen printing

Assessment

Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school

and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of

sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged

Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for

40 of the marks

Visits

Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where

the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies

Career Progression

Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile

Designer Model Maker etc

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 5: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|5 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

Qualifications Information

GCSE

General Certification of Secondary Education GCSEs are taken by most school-leaving age

students They are known as Level 2 qualifications

BTEC

BTECs are work-related qualifications suitable for a wide range of students built to

accommodate the needs of employers and allow progression to university They provide a

practical real-world approach to learning without sacrificing any of the essential subject

theory and are recognised by a large number of organisations in a wide range of sectors

BTECs offer natural progression along a vocational path from and to academic

qualifications and university

Cambrige Nationals

Cambridge Nationals are an exam-free alternative to GCSEs taking a more engaging

practical approach to learning and assessment

NVQ

NVQ is work based awards in England Wales and Northern Ireland that are achieved

through assessment and training

Choosing Your Subjects

The subjects and qualifications you study over Years 10 and 11 will affect how you spend

your time during your next two years at school It could also help set you up for the career or

college course you want later on

To help you decide what to study in Years 10 and 11 start by asking yourself what you enjoy

doing and what you‟re good at You need to think about

What you‟re interested in it could be other cultures and languages writing projects

helping people being outdoors or designing things

What types of activity you enjoy most - working things out and thinking them through

practical activities or artistic options like painting drawing or performing music

What do you want to do as a career

You will then ask yourself whether your choices give you a balanced programme and

whether your choices limit your options once you have completed your Year 11 studies

It is very important that you will seek help and advice about your GCSEs Subject teachers

your Head of House and Form Tutor will be very pleased to discuss any problems with you

We hope that your parents will play an active part in advising you on these important

decisions They can either talk to Staff at the Options Evening on Thursday 15th March 2012

or if required make an appointment to see them

Please remember the following points

Do talk to students who are in Year 10 or 11 about a specific subject you might wish to

study

6|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

Do get all the information you can from this booklet and by asking questions before

deciding on your subjects We provide information about all the subjects offered for study

in Years 10 and 11 on the following pages Please read the course descriptions carefully

Try not to consider only the subjects you need but also the subjects that interest you

Try not to choose a subject just because you like (or dislike) the teacher You may have

different teacher next year

Do think about your skills and how you work and try to match these with the different

demands of the different subjects Subjects have different amount of marks awarded for

examinations and for controlled assessments Do think carefully about how you best work

when making your selection of subjects

Try not to choose a subject simply because it sounds new or unusual Make sure you

understand what is involved in taking this subject

Do NOT fill in the subject request sheet until you are happy that you have made the correct

choices for your needs and interests

Making A Balanced Choice

It is important that you continue to study a variety of courses Not only will this contribute to

your general education it will also mean that doors to a wide number of careers and further

study will remain open to you Do remember to consider the range of skills that your subjects

will provide you with

The English Baccalaureate (EBacc)

The English Baccalaureate which was introduced as a performance measure in 2010

performance table is not a new qualification It is a new certificate that will be awarded to

any student who secures a GCSE Grade C or higher in the following subject

English

Mathematics

2 Sciences (Core and Additional or 2 out of Biology Chemistry and physics)

1 Modern Foreign Language or a Classical Language

1 Humanity (History or Geography)

The subjects included are designed to ensure that all students have the opportunity to study

a broad core of subjects ensuring that doors are not closed off to them in terms of future

progression

We allow all students to opt for subjects to make up the EBacc however we do not make it

compulsory for any student It is important that you choose subjects that you enjoy and are

therefore more likely to secure a good grade in You should also consider your own talents

and aspirations for the future

What if I Make A Wrong Choice We hope this will not happen but if it does then we will interview you and if possible swap

your subject What we have found in the past is that students decide on a subject because

their friends have chosen it and after a time the student realises they don‟t like the subject

therefore do not choose a subject because your friend has chosen it

THE

CORE

CURRICULUM

Page|9 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

The skills of reading writing speaking and listening are of vital importance in many areas

Not only are they essential in many careers they also underpin successful study at all levels

and a proficiency in them can also add immeasurably to an individual‟s general quality of

life

This specification is designed to aid and assess such development and to encourage

learners to be inspired moved and changed by following a broad coherent satisfying and

worthwhile course of study It will prepare learners to make informed decisions about further

learning opportunities and career choices and to use language to participate effectively in

society and employment

Different forms of assessment are appropriate to these different skills and this is recognised in

this specification Reading and Writing are assessed through controlled assessment and in

two externally marked units Speaking and Listening are assessed in a variety of different

situations during the course

Assessment

Written Paper

Unit 1 (20) Studying written language - non-fiction texts (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)

This unit will test through structured questions the reading of two non-fiction texts Non-

fiction texts may include fact-sheets leaflets letters extracts from autobiographies

biographies diaries advertisements reports articles and digital and multi-modal texts of

various kinds from newspapers and magazines brochures and the internet Visual

material will always be included in the material used

Unit 2 (20) Using written language - information and ideas (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)

This unit will test transactional and discursive writing through two equally weighted tasks

(20 marks each) Across the two tasks students will be offered opportunities to write for a

range of audiences and purposes adapting style to form and real-life context in for

example letters articles leaflets reviews etc

10|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (30) Literary reading and creative writing (80 Raw Marks 60 UMS)

Studying written language extended literary text (15)

Students need to present one assignment which is a sustained response to an extended

text The text must either be a Shakespeare play or one chosen from the GCSE English

Literature external assessment set text lists excluding poetry

Using language creative writing (15)

Students will be required to complete ONE piece of descriptive writing and ONE piece of

narrativeexpressive writing drawn from tasks supplied by WJEC

Unit 4 (30) Spoken language (60 Raw Marks 60 UMS)

Using Language Speaking and Listening (Communicating and adapting language

interacting and responding creating and sustaining roles) (20)

Students will be required to complete at least three Speaking and Listening tasks through

the exploration of ideas texts and issues in scripted and improvised work The three tasks

will cover the following areas

1 Communicating and adapting language

2 Interacting and responding

3 Creating and sustaining roles

Studying spoken language Variations choices change in spoken language (10)

Students will be required to study an aspect of spoken language The assignment will be

a sustained response to their own or others‟ uses of spoken language presented by

recording transcript or recollection

Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an

informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama

Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students

have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English

Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can

greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead

a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading

Assessment

External Assessment

Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)

Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require

students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text

Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore

respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit

students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3

Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a

contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text

OR

Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English

IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)

EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based

on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students

will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and

a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection

Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally

assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G

(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and

tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and

can do

Tier Grades Available

Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MATHEMATICS (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four

lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one

with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both

foundation and higher papers

Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be

able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between

mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of

mathematics are included in each paper

The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a

good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves

to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are

available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand

and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but

the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made

We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory

results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to

take an additional GCSE in statistics

Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)

Exam Board AQA

There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in

September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just

learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the

world in which we live

Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science

can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics

In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of

science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should

be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to

day basis

Year 10

Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below

These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions

throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework

The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of

Year 10

Year 11

The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and

Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers

containing structured questions rather than objective tests

GCSE Science A

Biology 1 25

Chemistry 1 25

Physics 1 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

GCSE Science B

Biology 2 25

Chemistry 2 25

Physics 2 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued

Exam Board AQA

The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same

proportion of marks

Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing

course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in

order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students

regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent

preparation for A level studies

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE

(EDEXCEL)

For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more

accessible course is BTEC Science

Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined

into one course

The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is

assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well

have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final

exam

The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs

Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the

optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs

The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active

leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3

qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences

The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques

personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the

workplace

1 Fitness Testing and Training

This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training

methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately

conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national

standards

2 Practical Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one

team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their

assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve

personal performance

3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport

The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of

the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help

students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy

4 Development of Personal Fitness

This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future

Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they

can progess their fitness to higher levels

5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems

This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to

exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

THE

OPTIONAL

CURRICULUM

Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during

Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products

Course Information

Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and

techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study

within Three-Dimensional Design

making appropriate use of colour line tone texture

shape and form decoration scale and proportion

using different approaches to recording images such

as observation analysis expression and imagination

showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept

issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as

appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-

Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of

form and function

making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques

providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities

composition rhythm scale and structure

providing evidence of the use of safe working practices

In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car

and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and

skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be

able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM

machine

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is

presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is

also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks

Career Progression

Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form

Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product

Design or Architecture

20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to

take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce

work using a number of different techniques which have been listed

below

Painting and drawing

Graphics

Sculptureconstruction

Photography

Printmaking

A foundation course which gives students experience of all of

these is run during the first two terms

Painting and Drawing

The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students

regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques

they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE

examination

Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus

but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students

whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities

The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but

students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as

possible in the preparation and production of coursework

3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)

The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding

of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context

Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and

experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the

form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships

between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the

interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale

structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional

objects

Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Printmaking

Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed

image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate

Lino printing

Card printing

Monoprinting

Polystyrene sheet printing

Screen printing

Assessment

Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school

and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of

sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged

Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for

40 of the marks

Visits

Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where

the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies

Career Progression

Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile

Designer Model Maker etc

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 6: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

6|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

Do get all the information you can from this booklet and by asking questions before

deciding on your subjects We provide information about all the subjects offered for study

in Years 10 and 11 on the following pages Please read the course descriptions carefully

Try not to consider only the subjects you need but also the subjects that interest you

Try not to choose a subject just because you like (or dislike) the teacher You may have

different teacher next year

Do think about your skills and how you work and try to match these with the different

demands of the different subjects Subjects have different amount of marks awarded for

examinations and for controlled assessments Do think carefully about how you best work

when making your selection of subjects

Try not to choose a subject simply because it sounds new or unusual Make sure you

understand what is involved in taking this subject

Do NOT fill in the subject request sheet until you are happy that you have made the correct

choices for your needs and interests

Making A Balanced Choice

It is important that you continue to study a variety of courses Not only will this contribute to

your general education it will also mean that doors to a wide number of careers and further

study will remain open to you Do remember to consider the range of skills that your subjects

will provide you with

The English Baccalaureate (EBacc)

The English Baccalaureate which was introduced as a performance measure in 2010

performance table is not a new qualification It is a new certificate that will be awarded to

any student who secures a GCSE Grade C or higher in the following subject

English

Mathematics

2 Sciences (Core and Additional or 2 out of Biology Chemistry and physics)

1 Modern Foreign Language or a Classical Language

1 Humanity (History or Geography)

The subjects included are designed to ensure that all students have the opportunity to study

a broad core of subjects ensuring that doors are not closed off to them in terms of future

progression

We allow all students to opt for subjects to make up the EBacc however we do not make it

compulsory for any student It is important that you choose subjects that you enjoy and are

therefore more likely to secure a good grade in You should also consider your own talents

and aspirations for the future

What if I Make A Wrong Choice We hope this will not happen but if it does then we will interview you and if possible swap

your subject What we have found in the past is that students decide on a subject because

their friends have chosen it and after a time the student realises they don‟t like the subject

therefore do not choose a subject because your friend has chosen it

THE

CORE

CURRICULUM

Page|9 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

The skills of reading writing speaking and listening are of vital importance in many areas

Not only are they essential in many careers they also underpin successful study at all levels

and a proficiency in them can also add immeasurably to an individual‟s general quality of

life

This specification is designed to aid and assess such development and to encourage

learners to be inspired moved and changed by following a broad coherent satisfying and

worthwhile course of study It will prepare learners to make informed decisions about further

learning opportunities and career choices and to use language to participate effectively in

society and employment

Different forms of assessment are appropriate to these different skills and this is recognised in

this specification Reading and Writing are assessed through controlled assessment and in

two externally marked units Speaking and Listening are assessed in a variety of different

situations during the course

Assessment

Written Paper

Unit 1 (20) Studying written language - non-fiction texts (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)

This unit will test through structured questions the reading of two non-fiction texts Non-

fiction texts may include fact-sheets leaflets letters extracts from autobiographies

biographies diaries advertisements reports articles and digital and multi-modal texts of

various kinds from newspapers and magazines brochures and the internet Visual

material will always be included in the material used

Unit 2 (20) Using written language - information and ideas (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)

This unit will test transactional and discursive writing through two equally weighted tasks

(20 marks each) Across the two tasks students will be offered opportunities to write for a

range of audiences and purposes adapting style to form and real-life context in for

example letters articles leaflets reviews etc

10|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (30) Literary reading and creative writing (80 Raw Marks 60 UMS)

Studying written language extended literary text (15)

Students need to present one assignment which is a sustained response to an extended

text The text must either be a Shakespeare play or one chosen from the GCSE English

Literature external assessment set text lists excluding poetry

Using language creative writing (15)

Students will be required to complete ONE piece of descriptive writing and ONE piece of

narrativeexpressive writing drawn from tasks supplied by WJEC

Unit 4 (30) Spoken language (60 Raw Marks 60 UMS)

Using Language Speaking and Listening (Communicating and adapting language

interacting and responding creating and sustaining roles) (20)

Students will be required to complete at least three Speaking and Listening tasks through

the exploration of ideas texts and issues in scripted and improvised work The three tasks

will cover the following areas

1 Communicating and adapting language

2 Interacting and responding

3 Creating and sustaining roles

Studying spoken language Variations choices change in spoken language (10)

Students will be required to study an aspect of spoken language The assignment will be

a sustained response to their own or others‟ uses of spoken language presented by

recording transcript or recollection

Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an

informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama

Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students

have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English

Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can

greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead

a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading

Assessment

External Assessment

Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)

Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require

students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text

Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore

respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit

students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3

Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a

contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text

OR

Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English

IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)

EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based

on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students

will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and

a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection

Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally

assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G

(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and

tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and

can do

Tier Grades Available

Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MATHEMATICS (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four

lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one

with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both

foundation and higher papers

Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be

able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between

mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of

mathematics are included in each paper

The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a

good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves

to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are

available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand

and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but

the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made

We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory

results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to

take an additional GCSE in statistics

Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)

Exam Board AQA

There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in

September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just

learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the

world in which we live

Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science

can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics

In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of

science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should

be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to

day basis

Year 10

Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below

These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions

throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework

The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of

Year 10

Year 11

The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and

Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers

containing structured questions rather than objective tests

GCSE Science A

Biology 1 25

Chemistry 1 25

Physics 1 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

GCSE Science B

Biology 2 25

Chemistry 2 25

Physics 2 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued

Exam Board AQA

The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same

proportion of marks

Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing

course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in

order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students

regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent

preparation for A level studies

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE

(EDEXCEL)

For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more

accessible course is BTEC Science

Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined

into one course

The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is

assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well

have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final

exam

The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs

Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the

optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs

The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active

leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3

qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences

The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques

personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the

workplace

1 Fitness Testing and Training

This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training

methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately

conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national

standards

2 Practical Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one

team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their

assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve

personal performance

3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport

The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of

the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help

students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy

4 Development of Personal Fitness

This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future

Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they

can progess their fitness to higher levels

5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems

This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to

exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

THE

OPTIONAL

CURRICULUM

Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during

Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products

Course Information

Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and

techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study

within Three-Dimensional Design

making appropriate use of colour line tone texture

shape and form decoration scale and proportion

using different approaches to recording images such

as observation analysis expression and imagination

showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept

issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as

appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-

Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of

form and function

making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques

providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities

composition rhythm scale and structure

providing evidence of the use of safe working practices

In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car

and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and

skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be

able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM

machine

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is

presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is

also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks

Career Progression

Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form

Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product

Design or Architecture

20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to

take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce

work using a number of different techniques which have been listed

below

Painting and drawing

Graphics

Sculptureconstruction

Photography

Printmaking

A foundation course which gives students experience of all of

these is run during the first two terms

Painting and Drawing

The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students

regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques

they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE

examination

Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus

but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students

whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities

The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but

students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as

possible in the preparation and production of coursework

3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)

The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding

of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context

Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and

experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the

form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships

between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the

interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale

structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional

objects

Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Printmaking

Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed

image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate

Lino printing

Card printing

Monoprinting

Polystyrene sheet printing

Screen printing

Assessment

Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school

and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of

sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged

Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for

40 of the marks

Visits

Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where

the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies

Career Progression

Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile

Designer Model Maker etc

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 7: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

THE

CORE

CURRICULUM

Page|9 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

The skills of reading writing speaking and listening are of vital importance in many areas

Not only are they essential in many careers they also underpin successful study at all levels

and a proficiency in them can also add immeasurably to an individual‟s general quality of

life

This specification is designed to aid and assess such development and to encourage

learners to be inspired moved and changed by following a broad coherent satisfying and

worthwhile course of study It will prepare learners to make informed decisions about further

learning opportunities and career choices and to use language to participate effectively in

society and employment

Different forms of assessment are appropriate to these different skills and this is recognised in

this specification Reading and Writing are assessed through controlled assessment and in

two externally marked units Speaking and Listening are assessed in a variety of different

situations during the course

Assessment

Written Paper

Unit 1 (20) Studying written language - non-fiction texts (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)

This unit will test through structured questions the reading of two non-fiction texts Non-

fiction texts may include fact-sheets leaflets letters extracts from autobiographies

biographies diaries advertisements reports articles and digital and multi-modal texts of

various kinds from newspapers and magazines brochures and the internet Visual

material will always be included in the material used

Unit 2 (20) Using written language - information and ideas (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)

This unit will test transactional and discursive writing through two equally weighted tasks

(20 marks each) Across the two tasks students will be offered opportunities to write for a

range of audiences and purposes adapting style to form and real-life context in for

example letters articles leaflets reviews etc

10|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (30) Literary reading and creative writing (80 Raw Marks 60 UMS)

Studying written language extended literary text (15)

Students need to present one assignment which is a sustained response to an extended

text The text must either be a Shakespeare play or one chosen from the GCSE English

Literature external assessment set text lists excluding poetry

Using language creative writing (15)

Students will be required to complete ONE piece of descriptive writing and ONE piece of

narrativeexpressive writing drawn from tasks supplied by WJEC

Unit 4 (30) Spoken language (60 Raw Marks 60 UMS)

Using Language Speaking and Listening (Communicating and adapting language

interacting and responding creating and sustaining roles) (20)

Students will be required to complete at least three Speaking and Listening tasks through

the exploration of ideas texts and issues in scripted and improvised work The three tasks

will cover the following areas

1 Communicating and adapting language

2 Interacting and responding

3 Creating and sustaining roles

Studying spoken language Variations choices change in spoken language (10)

Students will be required to study an aspect of spoken language The assignment will be

a sustained response to their own or others‟ uses of spoken language presented by

recording transcript or recollection

Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an

informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama

Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students

have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English

Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can

greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead

a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading

Assessment

External Assessment

Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)

Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require

students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text

Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore

respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit

students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3

Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a

contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text

OR

Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English

IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)

EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based

on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students

will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and

a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection

Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally

assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G

(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and

tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and

can do

Tier Grades Available

Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MATHEMATICS (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four

lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one

with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both

foundation and higher papers

Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be

able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between

mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of

mathematics are included in each paper

The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a

good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves

to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are

available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand

and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but

the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made

We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory

results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to

take an additional GCSE in statistics

Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)

Exam Board AQA

There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in

September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just

learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the

world in which we live

Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science

can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics

In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of

science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should

be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to

day basis

Year 10

Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below

These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions

throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework

The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of

Year 10

Year 11

The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and

Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers

containing structured questions rather than objective tests

GCSE Science A

Biology 1 25

Chemistry 1 25

Physics 1 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

GCSE Science B

Biology 2 25

Chemistry 2 25

Physics 2 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued

Exam Board AQA

The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same

proportion of marks

Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing

course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in

order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students

regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent

preparation for A level studies

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE

(EDEXCEL)

For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more

accessible course is BTEC Science

Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined

into one course

The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is

assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well

have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final

exam

The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs

Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the

optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs

The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active

leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3

qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences

The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques

personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the

workplace

1 Fitness Testing and Training

This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training

methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately

conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national

standards

2 Practical Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one

team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their

assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve

personal performance

3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport

The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of

the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help

students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy

4 Development of Personal Fitness

This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future

Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they

can progess their fitness to higher levels

5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems

This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to

exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

THE

OPTIONAL

CURRICULUM

Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during

Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products

Course Information

Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and

techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study

within Three-Dimensional Design

making appropriate use of colour line tone texture

shape and form decoration scale and proportion

using different approaches to recording images such

as observation analysis expression and imagination

showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept

issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as

appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-

Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of

form and function

making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques

providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities

composition rhythm scale and structure

providing evidence of the use of safe working practices

In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car

and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and

skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be

able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM

machine

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is

presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is

also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks

Career Progression

Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form

Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product

Design or Architecture

20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to

take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce

work using a number of different techniques which have been listed

below

Painting and drawing

Graphics

Sculptureconstruction

Photography

Printmaking

A foundation course which gives students experience of all of

these is run during the first two terms

Painting and Drawing

The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students

regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques

they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE

examination

Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus

but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students

whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities

The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but

students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as

possible in the preparation and production of coursework

3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)

The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding

of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context

Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and

experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the

form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships

between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the

interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale

structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional

objects

Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Printmaking

Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed

image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate

Lino printing

Card printing

Monoprinting

Polystyrene sheet printing

Screen printing

Assessment

Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school

and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of

sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged

Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for

40 of the marks

Visits

Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where

the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies

Career Progression

Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile

Designer Model Maker etc

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 8: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|9 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

The skills of reading writing speaking and listening are of vital importance in many areas

Not only are they essential in many careers they also underpin successful study at all levels

and a proficiency in them can also add immeasurably to an individual‟s general quality of

life

This specification is designed to aid and assess such development and to encourage

learners to be inspired moved and changed by following a broad coherent satisfying and

worthwhile course of study It will prepare learners to make informed decisions about further

learning opportunities and career choices and to use language to participate effectively in

society and employment

Different forms of assessment are appropriate to these different skills and this is recognised in

this specification Reading and Writing are assessed through controlled assessment and in

two externally marked units Speaking and Listening are assessed in a variety of different

situations during the course

Assessment

Written Paper

Unit 1 (20) Studying written language - non-fiction texts (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)

This unit will test through structured questions the reading of two non-fiction texts Non-

fiction texts may include fact-sheets leaflets letters extracts from autobiographies

biographies diaries advertisements reports articles and digital and multi-modal texts of

various kinds from newspapers and magazines brochures and the internet Visual

material will always be included in the material used

Unit 2 (20) Using written language - information and ideas (40 Raw Marks 40 UMS)

This unit will test transactional and discursive writing through two equally weighted tasks

(20 marks each) Across the two tasks students will be offered opportunities to write for a

range of audiences and purposes adapting style to form and real-life context in for

example letters articles leaflets reviews etc

10|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (30) Literary reading and creative writing (80 Raw Marks 60 UMS)

Studying written language extended literary text (15)

Students need to present one assignment which is a sustained response to an extended

text The text must either be a Shakespeare play or one chosen from the GCSE English

Literature external assessment set text lists excluding poetry

Using language creative writing (15)

Students will be required to complete ONE piece of descriptive writing and ONE piece of

narrativeexpressive writing drawn from tasks supplied by WJEC

Unit 4 (30) Spoken language (60 Raw Marks 60 UMS)

Using Language Speaking and Listening (Communicating and adapting language

interacting and responding creating and sustaining roles) (20)

Students will be required to complete at least three Speaking and Listening tasks through

the exploration of ideas texts and issues in scripted and improvised work The three tasks

will cover the following areas

1 Communicating and adapting language

2 Interacting and responding

3 Creating and sustaining roles

Studying spoken language Variations choices change in spoken language (10)

Students will be required to study an aspect of spoken language The assignment will be

a sustained response to their own or others‟ uses of spoken language presented by

recording transcript or recollection

Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an

informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama

Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students

have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English

Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can

greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead

a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading

Assessment

External Assessment

Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)

Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require

students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text

Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore

respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit

students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3

Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a

contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text

OR

Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English

IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)

EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based

on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students

will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and

a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection

Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally

assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G

(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and

tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and

can do

Tier Grades Available

Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MATHEMATICS (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four

lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one

with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both

foundation and higher papers

Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be

able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between

mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of

mathematics are included in each paper

The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a

good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves

to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are

available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand

and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but

the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made

We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory

results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to

take an additional GCSE in statistics

Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)

Exam Board AQA

There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in

September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just

learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the

world in which we live

Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science

can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics

In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of

science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should

be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to

day basis

Year 10

Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below

These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions

throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework

The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of

Year 10

Year 11

The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and

Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers

containing structured questions rather than objective tests

GCSE Science A

Biology 1 25

Chemistry 1 25

Physics 1 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

GCSE Science B

Biology 2 25

Chemistry 2 25

Physics 2 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued

Exam Board AQA

The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same

proportion of marks

Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing

course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in

order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students

regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent

preparation for A level studies

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE

(EDEXCEL)

For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more

accessible course is BTEC Science

Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined

into one course

The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is

assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well

have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final

exam

The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs

Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the

optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs

The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active

leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3

qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences

The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques

personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the

workplace

1 Fitness Testing and Training

This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training

methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately

conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national

standards

2 Practical Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one

team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their

assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve

personal performance

3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport

The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of

the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help

students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy

4 Development of Personal Fitness

This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future

Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they

can progess their fitness to higher levels

5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems

This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to

exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

THE

OPTIONAL

CURRICULUM

Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during

Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products

Course Information

Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and

techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study

within Three-Dimensional Design

making appropriate use of colour line tone texture

shape and form decoration scale and proportion

using different approaches to recording images such

as observation analysis expression and imagination

showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept

issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as

appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-

Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of

form and function

making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques

providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities

composition rhythm scale and structure

providing evidence of the use of safe working practices

In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car

and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and

skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be

able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM

machine

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is

presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is

also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks

Career Progression

Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form

Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product

Design or Architecture

20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to

take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce

work using a number of different techniques which have been listed

below

Painting and drawing

Graphics

Sculptureconstruction

Photography

Printmaking

A foundation course which gives students experience of all of

these is run during the first two terms

Painting and Drawing

The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students

regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques

they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE

examination

Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus

but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students

whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities

The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but

students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as

possible in the preparation and production of coursework

3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)

The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding

of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context

Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and

experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the

form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships

between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the

interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale

structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional

objects

Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Printmaking

Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed

image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate

Lino printing

Card printing

Monoprinting

Polystyrene sheet printing

Screen printing

Assessment

Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school

and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of

sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged

Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for

40 of the marks

Visits

Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where

the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies

Career Progression

Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile

Designer Model Maker etc

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 9: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

10|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LANGUAGE (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (30) Literary reading and creative writing (80 Raw Marks 60 UMS)

Studying written language extended literary text (15)

Students need to present one assignment which is a sustained response to an extended

text The text must either be a Shakespeare play or one chosen from the GCSE English

Literature external assessment set text lists excluding poetry

Using language creative writing (15)

Students will be required to complete ONE piece of descriptive writing and ONE piece of

narrativeexpressive writing drawn from tasks supplied by WJEC

Unit 4 (30) Spoken language (60 Raw Marks 60 UMS)

Using Language Speaking and Listening (Communicating and adapting language

interacting and responding creating and sustaining roles) (20)

Students will be required to complete at least three Speaking and Listening tasks through

the exploration of ideas texts and issues in scripted and improvised work The three tasks

will cover the following areas

1 Communicating and adapting language

2 Interacting and responding

3 Creating and sustaining roles

Studying spoken language Variations choices change in spoken language (10)

Students will be required to study an aspect of spoken language The assignment will be

a sustained response to their own or others‟ uses of spoken language presented by

recording transcript or recollection

Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an

informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama

Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students

have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English

Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can

greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead

a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading

Assessment

External Assessment

Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)

Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require

students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text

Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore

respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit

students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3

Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a

contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text

OR

Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English

IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)

EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based

on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students

will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and

a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection

Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally

assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G

(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and

tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and

can do

Tier Grades Available

Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MATHEMATICS (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four

lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one

with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both

foundation and higher papers

Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be

able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between

mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of

mathematics are included in each paper

The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a

good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves

to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are

available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand

and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but

the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made

We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory

results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to

take an additional GCSE in statistics

Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)

Exam Board AQA

There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in

September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just

learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the

world in which we live

Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science

can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics

In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of

science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should

be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to

day basis

Year 10

Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below

These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions

throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework

The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of

Year 10

Year 11

The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and

Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers

containing structured questions rather than objective tests

GCSE Science A

Biology 1 25

Chemistry 1 25

Physics 1 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

GCSE Science B

Biology 2 25

Chemistry 2 25

Physics 2 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued

Exam Board AQA

The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same

proportion of marks

Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing

course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in

order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students

regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent

preparation for A level studies

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE

(EDEXCEL)

For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more

accessible course is BTEC Science

Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined

into one course

The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is

assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well

have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final

exam

The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs

Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the

optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs

The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active

leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3

qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences

The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques

personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the

workplace

1 Fitness Testing and Training

This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training

methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately

conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national

standards

2 Practical Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one

team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their

assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve

personal performance

3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport

The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of

the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help

students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy

4 Development of Personal Fitness

This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future

Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they

can progess their fitness to higher levels

5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems

This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to

exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

THE

OPTIONAL

CURRICULUM

Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during

Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products

Course Information

Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and

techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study

within Three-Dimensional Design

making appropriate use of colour line tone texture

shape and form decoration scale and proportion

using different approaches to recording images such

as observation analysis expression and imagination

showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept

issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as

appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-

Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of

form and function

making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques

providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities

composition rhythm scale and structure

providing evidence of the use of safe working practices

In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car

and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and

skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be

able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM

machine

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is

presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is

also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks

Career Progression

Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form

Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product

Design or Architecture

20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to

take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce

work using a number of different techniques which have been listed

below

Painting and drawing

Graphics

Sculptureconstruction

Photography

Printmaking

A foundation course which gives students experience of all of

these is run during the first two terms

Painting and Drawing

The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students

regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques

they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE

examination

Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus

but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students

whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities

The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but

students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as

possible in the preparation and production of coursework

3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)

The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding

of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context

Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and

experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the

form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships

between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the

interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale

structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional

objects

Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Printmaking

Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed

image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate

Lino printing

Card printing

Monoprinting

Polystyrene sheet printing

Screen printing

Assessment

Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school

and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of

sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged

Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for

40 of the marks

Visits

Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where

the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies

Career Progression

Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile

Designer Model Maker etc

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 10: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|11 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ENGLISH LITERATURE (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This specification is based on the conviction that the study of literature should centre on an

informed personal response to a range of texts in the genres of prose poetry and drama

Assessment is through controlled assessment and examination Teachers and their students

have some flexibility in the choice of texts to be studied and some overlap with GCSE English

Language is possible and indeed encouraged as it is felt that the study of literature can

greatly enhance a student‟s writing skills and that practising hisher own writing skills can lead

a student to increased enjoyment of and success in reading

Assessment

External Assessment

Unit 1 (35)Prose (different cultures) and poetry (contemporary) (50 Raw Marks 70 UMS)

Section A (21) requires study of a prose text from a different culture It will require

students to answer two questions on the chosen prose text

Section B (14) will consist of a question offering some structure for students to explore

respond to and compare two contemporary unseen poems In preparation for this unit

students will need to study at least fifteen poems in addition to those studied for Unit 3

Unit 2a (40) Literary heritage drama and contemporary prose(60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a drama text from the EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage and a

contemporary prose text It will require students to answer two questions on each text

OR

Unit 2b Contemporary drama and literary heritage prose (60 Raw Marks 80 UMS)

This paper requires study of a contemporary drama text and a prose text from the English

IrishWelsh literary heritage It will require students to answer two questions on each text

Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 (25) Poetry and drama (literary heritage) (40 Raw Marks 50 UMS)

EnglishIrishWelsh literary heritage Poetry and Shakespeare play Assessment will be based

on a single assignment linking a play by Shakespeare and literary heritage poetry Students

will be required to study a Shakespeare play (not Othello or Much Ado about Nothing) and

a group of thematically linked poems taken from the WJEC poetry collection

Assessment for GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature is tiered ie externally

assessed componentsunits are targeted at the grade ranges of A-D (Higher Tier) and C-G

(Foundation Tier) while controlled assessments cater for the full range of ability Questions and

tasks will be designed to enable students to demonstrate what they know understand and

can do

Tier Grades Available

Higher A A B C D Foundation C D E F G

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

Students who narrowly fail to achieve Grade D on the Higher Tier will be awarded Grade E

12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MATHEMATICS (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four

lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one

with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both

foundation and higher papers

Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be

able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between

mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of

mathematics are included in each paper

The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a

good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves

to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are

available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand

and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but

the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made

We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory

results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to

take an additional GCSE in statistics

Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)

Exam Board AQA

There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in

September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just

learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the

world in which we live

Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science

can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics

In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of

science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should

be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to

day basis

Year 10

Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below

These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions

throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework

The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of

Year 10

Year 11

The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and

Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers

containing structured questions rather than objective tests

GCSE Science A

Biology 1 25

Chemistry 1 25

Physics 1 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

GCSE Science B

Biology 2 25

Chemistry 2 25

Physics 2 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued

Exam Board AQA

The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same

proportion of marks

Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing

course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in

order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students

regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent

preparation for A level studies

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE

(EDEXCEL)

For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more

accessible course is BTEC Science

Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined

into one course

The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is

assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well

have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final

exam

The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs

Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the

optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs

The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active

leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3

qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences

The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques

personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the

workplace

1 Fitness Testing and Training

This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training

methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately

conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national

standards

2 Practical Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one

team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their

assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve

personal performance

3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport

The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of

the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help

students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy

4 Development of Personal Fitness

This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future

Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they

can progess their fitness to higher levels

5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems

This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to

exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

THE

OPTIONAL

CURRICULUM

Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during

Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products

Course Information

Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and

techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study

within Three-Dimensional Design

making appropriate use of colour line tone texture

shape and form decoration scale and proportion

using different approaches to recording images such

as observation analysis expression and imagination

showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept

issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as

appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-

Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of

form and function

making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques

providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities

composition rhythm scale and structure

providing evidence of the use of safe working practices

In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car

and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and

skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be

able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM

machine

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is

presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is

also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks

Career Progression

Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form

Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product

Design or Architecture

20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to

take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce

work using a number of different techniques which have been listed

below

Painting and drawing

Graphics

Sculptureconstruction

Photography

Printmaking

A foundation course which gives students experience of all of

these is run during the first two terms

Painting and Drawing

The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students

regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques

they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE

examination

Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus

but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students

whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities

The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but

students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as

possible in the preparation and production of coursework

3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)

The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding

of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context

Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and

experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the

form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships

between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the

interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale

structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional

objects

Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Printmaking

Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed

image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate

Lino printing

Card printing

Monoprinting

Polystyrene sheet printing

Screen printing

Assessment

Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school

and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of

sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged

Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for

40 of the marks

Visits

Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where

the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies

Career Progression

Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile

Designer Model Maker etc

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 11: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

12|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MATHEMATICS (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Mathematics is a compulsory part of the curriculum for all students and currently takes four

lessons per week GCSE Mathematics is a linear course with two written examinations one

with a calculator The course takes a holistic approach and a grade C is available on both

foundation and higher papers

Students should develop knowledge skills and understanding of the content They should be

able to use their knowledge and understanding to make connections between

mathematical concepts and apply them to solve real life problems Functional elements of

mathematics are included in each paper

The course starts formally at the end of year 9 building on the work in years 7 and 8 so a

good start is made to cover the necessary material Students will need to apply themselves

to the tasks in class and complete their homework regularly Mathematics teachers are

available outside of lessons to help students who are finding concepts difficult to understand

and a weekly bdquocatch-up‟ club is available Students are set primarily according to ability but

the attitude to learning is also a factor to be considered when the groupings are made

We offer the opportunity to take GCSE Mathematics in Year 10 and providing satisfactory

results are achieved students may be given the opportunity to start the bdquoA‟ level course or to

take an additional GCSE in statistics

Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)

Exam Board AQA

There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in

September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just

learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the

world in which we live

Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science

can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics

In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of

science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should

be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to

day basis

Year 10

Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below

These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions

throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework

The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of

Year 10

Year 11

The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and

Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers

containing structured questions rather than objective tests

GCSE Science A

Biology 1 25

Chemistry 1 25

Physics 1 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

GCSE Science B

Biology 2 25

Chemistry 2 25

Physics 2 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued

Exam Board AQA

The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same

proportion of marks

Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing

course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in

order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students

regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent

preparation for A level studies

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE

(EDEXCEL)

For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more

accessible course is BTEC Science

Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined

into one course

The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is

assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well

have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final

exam

The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs

Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the

optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs

The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active

leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3

qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences

The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques

personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the

workplace

1 Fitness Testing and Training

This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training

methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately

conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national

standards

2 Practical Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one

team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their

assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve

personal performance

3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport

The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of

the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help

students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy

4 Development of Personal Fitness

This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future

Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they

can progess their fitness to higher levels

5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems

This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to

exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

THE

OPTIONAL

CURRICULUM

Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during

Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products

Course Information

Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and

techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study

within Three-Dimensional Design

making appropriate use of colour line tone texture

shape and form decoration scale and proportion

using different approaches to recording images such

as observation analysis expression and imagination

showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept

issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as

appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-

Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of

form and function

making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques

providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities

composition rhythm scale and structure

providing evidence of the use of safe working practices

In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car

and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and

skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be

able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM

machine

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is

presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is

also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks

Career Progression

Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form

Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product

Design or Architecture

20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to

take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce

work using a number of different techniques which have been listed

below

Painting and drawing

Graphics

Sculptureconstruction

Photography

Printmaking

A foundation course which gives students experience of all of

these is run during the first two terms

Painting and Drawing

The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students

regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques

they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE

examination

Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus

but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students

whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities

The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but

students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as

possible in the preparation and production of coursework

3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)

The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding

of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context

Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and

experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the

form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships

between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the

interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale

structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional

objects

Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Printmaking

Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed

image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate

Lino printing

Card printing

Monoprinting

Polystyrene sheet printing

Screen printing

Assessment

Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school

and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of

sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged

Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for

40 of the marks

Visits

Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where

the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies

Career Progression

Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile

Designer Model Maker etc

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 12: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|13 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD)

Exam Board AQA

There have been some major changes to the GCSE science courses which will begin began in

September 2011 There is now more emphasis on bdquoHow Science Works‟ which means not just

learning the theory but understanding the practical side of science and its relation to the

world in which we live

Science is a core subject and is therefore studied by all students The main areas of science

can be broadly broken into Biology Chemistry and Physics

In addition to the above students will be assessed on their knowledge and understanding of

science through coursework which will be set within stimulating contexts that students should

be able to relate to from their science lessons and their experiences of science on a day to

day basis

Year 10

Students in Year 10 will study six modules as indicated below

These six modules will be assessed by tests which will be taken on three separate occasions

throughout the year The final 25 of the marks will be awarded based on coursework

The majority of Year 10 students will gain the first of their two GCSEs in science at the end of

Year 10

Year 11

The structure of the Year 11 course is similar to that of Year 10 in that Biology Chemistry and

Physics will be studied however students will be assessed by means of three written papers

containing structured questions rather than objective tests

GCSE Science A

Biology 1 25

Chemistry 1 25

Physics 1 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

GCSE Science B

Biology 2 25

Chemistry 2 25

Physics 2 25

Centre Assessed Coursework 25

14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued

Exam Board AQA

The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same

proportion of marks

Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing

course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in

order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students

regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent

preparation for A level studies

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE

(EDEXCEL)

For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more

accessible course is BTEC Science

Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined

into one course

The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is

assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well

have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final

exam

The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs

Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the

optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs

The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active

leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3

qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences

The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques

personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the

workplace

1 Fitness Testing and Training

This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training

methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately

conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national

standards

2 Practical Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one

team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their

assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve

personal performance

3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport

The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of

the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help

students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy

4 Development of Personal Fitness

This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future

Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they

can progess their fitness to higher levels

5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems

This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to

exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

THE

OPTIONAL

CURRICULUM

Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during

Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products

Course Information

Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and

techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study

within Three-Dimensional Design

making appropriate use of colour line tone texture

shape and form decoration scale and proportion

using different approaches to recording images such

as observation analysis expression and imagination

showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept

issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as

appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-

Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of

form and function

making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques

providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities

composition rhythm scale and structure

providing evidence of the use of safe working practices

In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car

and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and

skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be

able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM

machine

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is

presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is

also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks

Career Progression

Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form

Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product

Design or Architecture

20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to

take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce

work using a number of different techniques which have been listed

below

Painting and drawing

Graphics

Sculptureconstruction

Photography

Printmaking

A foundation course which gives students experience of all of

these is run during the first two terms

Painting and Drawing

The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students

regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques

they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE

examination

Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus

but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students

whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities

The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but

students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as

possible in the preparation and production of coursework

3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)

The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding

of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context

Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and

experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the

form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships

between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the

interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale

structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional

objects

Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Printmaking

Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed

image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate

Lino printing

Card printing

Monoprinting

Polystyrene sheet printing

Screen printing

Assessment

Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school

and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of

sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged

Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for

40 of the marks

Visits

Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where

the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies

Career Progression

Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile

Designer Model Maker etc

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 13: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

14|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SCIENCE - MODULAR (GCSE DOUBLE AWARD) continued

Exam Board AQA

The coursework component will be assessed in a similar way to Year 10 and will carry the same

proportion of marks

Whilst the new GCSE science course is designed to be more interesting than the existing

course it is likely to be rather more challenging Students will need to work consistently hard in

order to achieve high level grades The course has been designed to ensure that all students

regardless of ability gain a good grounding in science The course is also an excellent

preparation for A level studies

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENTED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE

(EDEXCEL)

For some students who have found the study of Science difficult at Key Stage 3 a more

accessible course is BTEC Science

Students still study the 3 Science disciplines of Chemistry Biology and Physics but combined

into one course

The advantages of this course are that there is no traditional coursework component it is

assignment based so students who find that the stress of exams causes them to do less well

have the opportunity to achieve their potential It also has a practical approach and no final

exam

The course is the equivalent of 2 GCSEs

Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the

optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs

The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active

leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3

qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences

The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques

personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the

workplace

1 Fitness Testing and Training

This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training

methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately

conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national

standards

2 Practical Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one

team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their

assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve

personal performance

3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport

The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of

the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help

students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy

4 Development of Personal Fitness

This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future

Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they

can progess their fitness to higher levels

5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems

This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to

exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

THE

OPTIONAL

CURRICULUM

Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during

Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products

Course Information

Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and

techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study

within Three-Dimensional Design

making appropriate use of colour line tone texture

shape and form decoration scale and proportion

using different approaches to recording images such

as observation analysis expression and imagination

showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept

issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as

appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-

Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of

form and function

making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques

providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities

composition rhythm scale and structure

providing evidence of the use of safe working practices

In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car

and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and

skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be

able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM

machine

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is

presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is

also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks

Career Progression

Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form

Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product

Design or Architecture

20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to

take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce

work using a number of different techniques which have been listed

below

Painting and drawing

Graphics

Sculptureconstruction

Photography

Printmaking

A foundation course which gives students experience of all of

these is run during the first two terms

Painting and Drawing

The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students

regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques

they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE

examination

Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus

but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students

whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities

The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but

students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as

possible in the preparation and production of coursework

3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)

The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding

of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context

Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and

experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the

form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships

between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the

interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale

structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional

objects

Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Printmaking

Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed

image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate

Lino printing

Card printing

Monoprinting

Polystyrene sheet printing

Screen printing

Assessment

Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school

and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of

sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged

Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for

40 of the marks

Visits

Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where

the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies

Career Progression

Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile

Designer Model Maker etc

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 14: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|15 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Extended Certificate offers flexibility and a choice of emphasis through the

optional units It is broadly equivalent to two GCSEs

The course provides students with the opportunity to enter employment in the sport and active

leisure sector or to progress to vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel BTEC Level 3

qualifications in Sport and Sport and Exercise Sciences

The course also gives students the opportunity to develop a range of skills and techniques

personal qualities and attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter the

workplace

1 Fitness Testing and Training

This unit gives students the opportunity to explore the essential fitness requirements and training

methods used to achieve successful sports performance They learn how to accurately

conduct fitness and health tests and use key skills to compare the results against national

standards

2 Practical Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop students‟ knowledge of the rules skills and techniques for one

team and one individual sport through practical application Students will develop their

assessment skills as they observe each other perform and communicate effectively to improve

personal performance

3 Anatomy amp Physiology for Sport

The aim of this unit is to give students a good understanding of the structure and function of

the skeletal muscular cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human body This will help

students to gain a better idea of how their body works so that they can stay healthy

4 Development of Personal Fitness

This unit can prove invaluable to students who wish to stay fit and healthy in the future

Students learn how to get fit by actively working and developing their training skills so that they

can progess their fitness to higher levels

5 Effects of Exercise on the Body Systems

This unit again develops the students‟ awareness of how all systems of their body respond to

exercise Students learn about the great health benefits which can be achieved

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

THE

OPTIONAL

CURRICULUM

Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during

Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products

Course Information

Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and

techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study

within Three-Dimensional Design

making appropriate use of colour line tone texture

shape and form decoration scale and proportion

using different approaches to recording images such

as observation analysis expression and imagination

showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept

issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as

appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-

Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of

form and function

making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques

providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities

composition rhythm scale and structure

providing evidence of the use of safe working practices

In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car

and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and

skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be

able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM

machine

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is

presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is

also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks

Career Progression

Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form

Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product

Design or Architecture

20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to

take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce

work using a number of different techniques which have been listed

below

Painting and drawing

Graphics

Sculptureconstruction

Photography

Printmaking

A foundation course which gives students experience of all of

these is run during the first two terms

Painting and Drawing

The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students

regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques

they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE

examination

Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus

but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students

whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities

The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but

students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as

possible in the preparation and production of coursework

3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)

The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding

of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context

Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and

experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the

form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships

between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the

interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale

structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional

objects

Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Printmaking

Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed

image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate

Lino printing

Card printing

Monoprinting

Polystyrene sheet printing

Screen printing

Assessment

Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school

and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of

sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged

Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for

40 of the marks

Visits

Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where

the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies

Career Progression

Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile

Designer Model Maker etc

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 15: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

THE

OPTIONAL

CURRICULUM

Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during

Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products

Course Information

Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and

techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study

within Three-Dimensional Design

making appropriate use of colour line tone texture

shape and form decoration scale and proportion

using different approaches to recording images such

as observation analysis expression and imagination

showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept

issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as

appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-

Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of

form and function

making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques

providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities

composition rhythm scale and structure

providing evidence of the use of safe working practices

In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car

and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and

skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be

able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM

machine

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is

presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is

also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks

Career Progression

Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form

Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product

Design or Architecture

20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to

take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce

work using a number of different techniques which have been listed

below

Painting and drawing

Graphics

Sculptureconstruction

Photography

Printmaking

A foundation course which gives students experience of all of

these is run during the first two terms

Painting and Drawing

The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students

regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques

they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE

examination

Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus

but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students

whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities

The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but

students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as

possible in the preparation and production of coursework

3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)

The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding

of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context

Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and

experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the

form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships

between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the

interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale

structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional

objects

Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Printmaking

Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed

image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate

Lino printing

Card printing

Monoprinting

Polystyrene sheet printing

Screen printing

Assessment

Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school

and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of

sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged

Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for

40 of the marks

Visits

Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where

the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies

Career Progression

Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile

Designer Model Maker etc

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 16: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|19 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

3 DIMENSIONAL DESIGN (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you enjoyed designing and making products in the Design amp Technology workshops during

Years 789 and would like to continue making more complex and detailed products

Course Information

Students will be expected to demonstrate skills and

techniques in the context of their chosen area(s) of study

within Three-Dimensional Design

making appropriate use of colour line tone texture

shape and form decoration scale and proportion

using different approaches to recording images such

as observation analysis expression and imagination

showing in their work the ability to respond to an idea concept

issue theme or brief investigating different ways of working as

appropriate to their chosen area(s) of study within Three-

Dimensional Design showing understanding of the relationship of

form and function

making use of appropriate materials tools and techniques

providing evidence of an understanding of spatial qualities

composition rhythm scale and structure

providing evidence of the use of safe working practices

In Year 10 students will design and make a variety of projects such as a Spice rack Toy Car

and a Hand Trowel using a variety of machines and materials They will gain knowledge and

skills in manufacturing techniques production methods and the design process They will be

able to design products on the computer (CAD) and then cut them out on the new CAM

machine

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home is

presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks There is

also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the marks

Career Progression

Students can continue onto the A Level Product design course at Chessington‟s 6th Form

Alternatively they could pursue a career in an Engineering discipline Construction Product

Design or Architecture

20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to

take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce

work using a number of different techniques which have been listed

below

Painting and drawing

Graphics

Sculptureconstruction

Photography

Printmaking

A foundation course which gives students experience of all of

these is run during the first two terms

Painting and Drawing

The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students

regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques

they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE

examination

Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus

but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students

whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities

The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but

students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as

possible in the preparation and production of coursework

3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)

The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding

of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context

Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and

experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the

form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships

between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the

interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale

structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional

objects

Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Printmaking

Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed

image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate

Lino printing

Card printing

Monoprinting

Polystyrene sheet printing

Screen printing

Assessment

Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school

and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of

sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged

Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for

40 of the marks

Visits

Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where

the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies

Career Progression

Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile

Designer Model Maker etc

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 17: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

20|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

All students choosing Art and Design as their option are required to

take the unendorsed examination This allows them to produce

work using a number of different techniques which have been listed

below

Painting and drawing

Graphics

Sculptureconstruction

Photography

Printmaking

A foundation course which gives students experience of all of

these is run during the first two terms

Painting and Drawing

The Painting and Drawing course is structured to enable students

regardless of their ability to build on the skills and techniques

they have learned in their first three years at school and at the same time prepare for a GCSE

examination

Programmes of work will largely be determined by the demands of the examination syllabus

but every effort will be made to structure the course so that it meets the needs of the students

whilst taking into account their wide range of abilities

The Painting and Drawing disciplines will form the basis for most practical activities but

students will be encouraged to experiment with and use as broad a range of approaches as

possible in the preparation and production of coursework

3 Dimensional Studies (Sculpture)

The course is designed to develop the student‟s visual awareness sensitivity and understanding

of the work of Artists involving three dimensions in a contemporary and historical context

Students will be encouraged to develop ideas in preliminary studies through research and

experimentation observational recording and analysis of forms and to produce work in the

form of modelling carving casting construction and assembling The important relationships

between urbanrural landscapes communities and cultures will also be studied as will the

interaction of solid and void forms and shape pattern decoration colour texture scale

structure proportion rhythm movement and the effects of light upon three dimensional

objects

Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Printmaking

Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed

image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate

Lino printing

Card printing

Monoprinting

Polystyrene sheet printing

Screen printing

Assessment

Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school

and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of

sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged

Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for

40 of the marks

Visits

Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where

the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies

Career Progression

Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile

Designer Model Maker etc

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 18: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|21 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ART (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Printmaking

Students will be able to experiment with a number of simple methods for producing a printed

image Some of the following will be introduced when appropriate

Lino printing

Card printing

Monoprinting

Polystyrene sheet printing

Screen printing

Assessment

Art and Design requires students to carry out and complete work in their own time in school

and at home Preparation and research are an essential element of the course and the use of

sketchbooks when preparing work is encouraged

Coursework will account for 60 of the marks and externally set assignment will account for

40 of the marks

Visits

Students are encouraged to take part in all visits to Museums Galleries and Exhibitions where

the work on display is considered helpful in supporting coursework studies

Career Progression

Fashion Designer Interior Designer Costume Designer Artist Architect Cartoonist Textile

Designer Model Maker etc

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 19: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

22|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

This single GCSE course is a vocational qualification that is

suitable for those students who have an interest in the Catering

Industry and want a broad background in this area It would

also be a good foundation for those who wish to progress to

further education It will offer valuable preparation for students

who may want to enter the many careers in the Food Industry

Students must have a real interest in food and enjoy cooking

They must be prepared to work hard in order to reach a high

standard of presentation in their practical work

Course Information

Students who take the GCSE Catering course will learn about and demonstrate their

knowledge and understanding of the following areas of study

The industry ndash types of establishments that serve food and drink

Job roles employment opportunities and relevant training

Health safety and hygiene

Food preparation cooking and presentation

Nutrition and menu planning

Costing and portion control

Specialist equipment both small and large scale

Communication and record keeping

Environmental considerations

Students will be expected to supply their own ingredients for practical sessions that will include

the selection storage preparation and serving of

Students will also be expected to purchase a white chef‟s jacket from the College which they

must wear to all practical sessions

Meat and poultry Convenience products

Fish Sauces

Eggs Basic dough products

Dairy products Basic pastry products

Cereals flour rice pasta Cakes sponges and scones

Vegetables and fruit

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 20: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|23 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CATERING (GCSE) continued

Exam Board WJEC

Assessment

Visits

It is hoped that there will be some visits to local restaurants and a catering college Chefs may visit

some lessons to give demonstrations or work with students in practical lessons

Career Progression

Sous Chef Cake Decorator Junior Kitchen Assistant WaitressWaiter Nutritionist Dietician Food

Technologist Baker etc

60 of the final grade will come from 2

practical tasks where students must show

catering skills related to food preparation and

service

Each task must be accompanied by a folder

of notes that cover the investigation planning

and evaluation of the task

Task 1 (15 hours) will take place in Year 10

Task 2 (30 hours) will take place in Year 11

40 of the final grade will come from a

written examination paper (1 frac14 hours) on

Catering food and the customer

This will be taken at the end of Year 11

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 21: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

24|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CERTIFICATE IN CONSTRUCTION

Exam Board CITY amp GUILDS

This course is ideal for all students who are considering

a career in any part of the construction or building

industry It is of benefit weather they are considering a

craft or management position

Course Information

Students study for six periods a week and in the first

year concentrate on basic building skills

Carpentry

Electrics

Plumbing

Bricklaying

Health and safety

Site management

This is done through the City and Guilds Introductory Certificate in Basic Construction Skills in which

eight practical tasks must be passed and one theoretical on line test

The second year allows students to develop along their chosen path either developing their craft

skills or moving towards a professional career via the Diplomas in Construction and the Built

Environment This would be an ideal path for those considering a career in

Building management

Architecture

Town planning

Surveying

Engineering

Building control

Environmentalist

Landscape Architecture

Those students not considering a professional career would expand their skills in chosen areas

through further City and Guilds qualifications

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 22: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|25 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 FIRST CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMING ARTS DANCE

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Students will look at FIVE different units in order to achieve a

qualification on this course

The most appropriate units can be selected according to

the individual needs of each group from the following list

Performing Dance

The Development of Dance

Working in the Performing Arts Industry

Professional Development in the Performing Arts

Industry

Understanding Dance

Contemporary Dance

Jazz Dance

Musical Theatre

Makeup for Performers

There is a significant emphasis on Choreographic and

performance skills throughout each unit and students will

be expected to

Learn set dances

Learn dance vocabulary

Choreograph solo duo and small group dances

Improve their performance and technical skills

Perform in front of their peers and a broader based audience

See professionals at work

Write reviews of works

Study the effect of costume set design and props

Look at the cultural and historical context of dances they view

The course is internally assessed throughout by the teacher and students are informally

assessed during every lesson Students will also be assessed more formally through

Assignments which meet the criteria for each Unit These are marked by the teacher and

internally verified by another specialist teacher to ensure that they are of the highest quality

Students opting for this course must understand that to achieve a good grade at BTEC they

have to have a love of making up (choreographing) and performing dances to others They

must also have some basic dance ability such as being able to move in time with the music

Students will need to work in bare feet for much of this course

Students who enjoy all aspects of dance and movement and have the confidence to perform

to a small audience will be well suited to this course Students will be expected to work in their

own time after school to perfect their dances and complete Assignment briefs They should

also be happy to work in a range of different dance styles and not just one particular style

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 23: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

26|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

DRAMA (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

GCSE Drama is an exciting and practical course which offers opportunities to become a skilled

and confident performer

The course aims to encourage students to develop

an interest in and understanding of a range of

drama and theatre experiences

increased self and group awareness

imaginative creative communication and

social skills

a love and appreciation of attending a range of

live theatre experiences

The course consists of two parts

Coursework 60

Two of the following options only one of which may be a technicaldesign skill

Devised thematic work for performance to an audience

Acting

Improvisation

Theatre in Education presentation

Dancedrama

Set

Costume

Make-up

Properties

Masks

Puppets

Lighting

Sound

Stage management

Each option is assessed through two parts

Part One A mark awarded for group and communication skills

Part Two A mark awarded for the final performance

Written Paper 40

2 hours

A choice of any two questions based on the following sections

A Set play bdquoAnimal Farm‟

B Response to live productions seen during the course

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 24: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|27 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

ETHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board OCR

The bdquoPhilosophy and Ethics‟ GCSE will allow students to explore the fundamental questions

about life and existence encourage their personal social and cultural development and

enhance their understanding of different cultures and belief systems

Over the course of the two years students will study important and thought-provoking issues

such as the nature and existence of God good and evil and the conflict between religion

and science relationships poverty and medical ethics peace and justice and the role of the

media in today‟s world It is a broad satisfying and worthwhile course of study designed to

challenge and stimulate students and equip them with the necessary skills to lead constructive

and thoughtful lives in the modern world

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 25: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

28|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FILM STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board WJEC

ldquoThe secret to film is that its an illusionrdquo

George Lucas Director of Star Wars

This course is ideal for any student who is

Able to work independently or as part of a team

Creative and practical but also analytical

Enthusiastic about films

Interested in making their own short films

Over the two years students will

Plan storyboard film and edit a short film working in a small

group adding their own music and special effects

Understand how films are made and promoted

Learn about the business of making films

Make a close study of one genre of Hollywood films (currently Disaster Films)

Closely research and study at least two different non-Hollywood Films (made in Britain

Europe or Africa)

Prepare their own film promotion campaign

Write an in-depth analysis of films of their choice

Assessment is through

A portfolio of coursework and also

Two end of course examinations

Although it is a new course Film Studies is already a popular choice for many students

combining well with the Media study in English as well as Media

Studies itself Film Studies is increasingly well

thought of by many colleges as it combines

a practical creative approach with

analytical skills

From Citizen Kane to Inception

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 26: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|29 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

FRENCH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

The course outline for French is similar to Spanish It is not compulsory to have previous

knowledge of the language before starting the course but you need to be aware that it will

be more challenging for you and you need to put in a lot of effort to succeed However it is

not at all impossible

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 27: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

30|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Geography is a fascinating and wide-reaching subject and it has been shown that students

with Geography qualifications are some of the most employable

Why you should take Geography GCSE

It provides you with an understanding of global issues which will affect our lives now and

in the future

By the end of their GCSE you will have a better understanding of the way the world

works

Geography is a good link between the arts and sciences so it will help you in their other

subjects

You will understand how physical landscapes (eg rivers coasts mountains) are formed

You will be allowed to express opinions about people and places

Geography includes a range of academic skills that you will use in your future studies

Skills gained from Geography include

How to research and to investigate

Problem solving

Real world numeracy

How to collect record present and analyse data

Map reading

Creative thinking

How to write in an essay style and in a scientific style

Empathy and understanding of others

Topics of study will include

How are natural landscapes formed and how can we manage

them

What causes and how can we manage natural hazards

How do weather and climate work

How can we manage population around the world

How do towns and cities expand and how are they managed

How and why are some places rich whilst others are poor

How can we ensure development of global resources is sustainable

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 28: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|31 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GEOGRAPHY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board AQA

Career Links (As printed by the Royal Geographical Society)

How is the course assessed

GCSE Geography is assessed by two written Examinations (75) and by Coursework (25) in

the form of a Controlled Assessment

Fieldwork at the South Coast and elsewhere is an essential part of this course

Travel and tourist industry

Travel Guide Researcher

Property Researcher

Lawyers

Senior Researcher for County

Council

Government Statistician

TV Locations Unit

Business Consultants

Planners

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 29: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

32|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

GRAPHICS (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

If you are interested in the world of advertising like

developing logos and posters always have an interest in

the covers of DVDs books amp games and really enjoy

making products then this is the course for you

Course Information

A large part of the course is a practical investigation

into the techniques and materials used in the

advertising and packaging we see around us every

day

Students will develop skills in drawing both free hand and using computer aided design

model making printing techniques logo designing greetings card and popup book

design and build up skills to design DVD covers labels and posters

To be able to present this to an industrial standard students will use desktop publishing

software such as GIMP (a variation of Photoshop) and computer aided design packages

such as Google Sketchup 2D Design and Fireworks They will get the chance to use the

new computer aided manufacturing milling machine to design and make work like

models signs and games

Assessment

Students will complete a major project and portfolio that counts towards 60 of the overall

GCSE grade Previous projects have included creating a popup book producing

promotional material for the Olympics designing the identity and packaging for a new band

and making a travel game for children

Externally set assignment by the Exam board will account for 40 The typical brief might look

like this

A leading perfumeaftershave manufacturer are aware that the environment is a

current issue The general public are concerned about so want an environmentally

friendly perfumeaftershave bottle and packaging designed to meet the current

market needs You are to design and make a model bottle including the packaging

Career Progression

Or anything in the creative industries

Graphic designer Work in advertising Web designer

Architect Product designer Set designer

Computer game designer Window dresser Magazine editor

Fashion designer Comic book creator Book illustrator

Artist

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 30: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|33 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN HAIRDRESSING

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in hairdressing providing the foundation for a

range of work opportunities in an industry that is both interesting and varied The scheme

conforms to the requirements of the National Council for Vocational Qualifications (NCVQ)

Content

Students are assessed during practical on the job or simulated

situations Evidence must be shown in the form of a

portfolio Assessment will be continuous and students are

required to demonstrate competency in a variety of tasks Key

skills will be assessed through portfolio and exam

They will study the following subjects at Level 1

Shampoo and condition hair

Blow drying

Contribute to performing and colouring process

Contribute to the development of effective working

relationships

Support the health and safety of the salon

Prepare for hairdressing services and maintain work areas

Practical and theory work in the Colleges specialist hairdressing and beauty salons is

complemented by visiting lecturers manufacturers and visits to competitions exhibitions and

seminars

All students receive tutorial guidance and are set personal targets Continuous practical

assessment of hairdressing skills ensures satisfactory progress

How will they be assessed

They will work toward the NVQ Level 1 qualification in hairdressing through practical

assessments and by building a portfolio of work throughout the year Regular reports on

progress are provided to parentsguardians The programme is unit based and is delivered

individually at different stages throughout the course

There are four areas of assessment

Practical They carry out the skill

Oral They answer questions on their underpinning knowledge of the skill

Written a portfolio of evidence or a written test or an assignment depending on the unit

Online tests

Progression

They may go on to work as a junior in the hairdressing industry progress to other courses such

as NVQ Level 2 in Hairdressing or join an apprenticeship scheme

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 31: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

34|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

If you enjoy learning about how the events of the last 150 years help explain the problems and

opportunities of the world today then this GCSE History A Modern World course is the ideal

subject for you

You will gain insight on why important figures in history did what they did improve your ability

to judge whether you are being told the truth only part of the truth or something completely

untrue and develop valuable skills such as reasoning and debating skills

What career is History GCSE a useful qualification for

History is an academic subject that is highly respected by both employers and universities

alike It is particularly useful for the following careers

Course Information

The Edexcel GCSE History is a 2 year course which builds upon topic and skills

covered at Key Stage 3 The course is split into four sections with three of

these being assessed by exams and one being a controlled assessment in

the classroom

Students will follow a modular course which allows them to sit exams

almost directly after the topics have been studied This gives students

maximum opportunity to gain the highest grades throughout the two

year course without sitting a final exam based on a full two years work

Each of the following units is worth 25

Unit 1 Outline Studies ndash Superpower Relations

Key topics

bull How did the Cold War develop 1943 - 56

bull Three Cold War crises 1957 ndash 69 ( Berlin Cuba amp Czechoslovakia)

bull Why did the Cold War end 1979 - 1991

Law

Journalism

Television production and research

Advertising

Research

Marketing

Business Management

Accountancy

Archaeology

Museum work

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 32: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|35 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

HISTORY (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Unit 2 Modern World Depth Study ndash Germany 1918 ndash 1939

Key Topics

bull The Weimar Republic 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Nazi dictatorship 1933 ndash 1939

bull Hitler and the growth of the Nazi Party 1918 ndash 1933

bull The Holocaust

Unit 3 A divided union USA 1945-1970

Key topics

bull McCarthyism and the Red scare

bull Civil Rights - Protest ndash Martin Luther King

bull Protest ndash Vietnam hippies

bull Unit 4 (controlled assessment)

Representations of History

CA8 Crime Policing amp punishment in England c1880 ndash 1990

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 33: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

36|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

CAMBRIDGE NATIONALS LEVEL 2 IN ICT

Exam Board OCR

The ability to apply transferable ICT skills in an efficient and focused manner is now a pre-

requisite throughout academic studies and subsequent employment With over 3000 centres

and 15m registrations the Cambridge Nationals have been founded upon the

recommendations of the Wolf Report and created in partnership with teachers students

education specialists and industry-leading employers to fit the needs of both learners and

employers

Course Information

The course aims to develop

Problem-solving skills through the practical real life

application of ICT to complex problems

The ability to analyse appraise and make critical

judgements about the use of ICT systems

An awareness of the role of ICT in the management

manipulation and dissemination of information

Reporting skills necessary for effective communication with

others

The mandatory core unit has been designed to encompass the essential core knowledge and

competencies that are needed in the workplace to complete both complex and specialist

tasks The content is built into four strands ndash business information creative technical and a final

student-initiated project where the student can demonstrate all that they have learnt in terms

of ICT problem solving and project management

There are nine optional units to choose from once the mandatory units have been

completed These include bdquoIntroduction To Computer Programming‟ bdquoExploring Computer

Hardware And Networks‟ bdquoCreating Dynamic Products Using Sound And Vision‟ etc

Assessment

Students may achieve a Certificate and or a Diploma award equivalent to one or two

GCSEs The assessment range encompasses bdquoPass‟ Merit‟ bdquoDistinction‟ and bdquoDistinction‟

equivalent to bdquoC‟ bdquoB‟ bdquoA‟ and bdquoA‟ grades at GCSE

In order to successfully achieve the OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2 Certificate students

must complete two mandatory units plus two optional units Students who complete the two

mandatory units plus six optional units will be awarded an OCR Cambridge Nationals Level 2

Diploma

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 34: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|37 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MEDIA STUDIES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Such are the developments of the digital revolution that the study of the media has become

increasingly significant Media studies covers all modes of communication film TV comics

magazines newspapers radio internet and the diverse range of bdquonew media‟ gadgetry such

as I-phones Blackberries and the like The AQA course in GCSE Media studies enables students

to explore the technologies and industries behind the relentless streams of media messages

we are all subject to on a daily basis This course will help learners to develop a critical eye as

they de-code meanings and hidden meanings in advertising print and the diverse forms of

audio visual broadcasting Students also have superb opportunities to engage with bdquoreal-

world‟ production processes In today‟s media-saturated world this subject is both very

relevant and very challenging

Over the course Students will have the opportunity to study and produce a variety of different

forms ndash from newspapers television video games the internet popular music and film This is

a course that requires a good balance of independent initiative and an ability to work well in

a group Media Studies will suit students who enjoy hands on creative projects but are also

able to use conventional writing and media technology to evaluate what they have done in

an organised way

Assignments range from exploring negative stereotypes in soap operas like bdquoEastenders‟ to

looking at the audience appeal of sitcoms like bdquoFriends‟ and animation phenomena such as

bdquoThe Simpsons‟ to launching advertising campaigns

constructing bdquoshop-standard‟ magazine pages on Adobe

Photoshop and designing web pages the course is varied

interesting and highly rewarding

Coursework

The coursework component makes up 60 of the overall

assessment of the course Students produce three assignments

for assessment Students also undertake various bdquoPractical

Productions‟ the best of which is offered for final assessment

Introductory assignment Cross-media assignment Practical

Production and Evaluation

Assessment

This takes the form of a 1 hour 30 minutes ldquoControlled Testrdquo which is

undertaken in May of Year 11 It comprises 40 of the total marks for

the qualification

Recent topics for the examination have included

Soap opera Quiz shows

Action Films The Popular Press

Music magazines

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 35: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

38|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

NVQ IN MOTOR VEHICLE

This course takes place at Kingston College on Fridays and takes the place of two choices

IMIAL Level 1 Award in Automotive Pre-Vocational Learning

The primary purpose of this qualification is to provide an automotive pathway of specialist

learning for the Foundation Diploma in Engineering It has been approved by the Engineering

Diploma Development Partnership and the Sector Skills Council Automotive Skills

The Award can also be used as standalone qualification It offers students the opportunity to

broaden their horizons and explore automotive as career pathway It is ideal for both students

who enjoy a practical environment and those who are interested in pursuing a technical

career within the sector

Progression

The achievement of the qualification will provide a fast track to an IMIAL Level 2 Certificate

(VRQ) in the appropriate career route

Students will also have the opportunity to progress to an ASL Apprenticeship at Level 2 (using

the Level 2 Certificate as the Technical Certificate component of the ASL Apprenticeship

framework) in the appropriate route

Potential Job Opportunities

Motor Vehicle Body RepairerRefinisherBuilder

Motor Vehicle MechanicTechnician

Assessment Methods

Multiple Choice Examination

Oral Examination

Portfolio of Evidence

Practical Demonstration Assignment

Practical Examination

Task-based Controlled Assessment

Written Examination

Overall Assessment Method

Independent assessment takes the form of online multiple-choice tests for each unit

The online tests are marked by an IMI Awards software management system This forwards the

learners test results to the IMI Awards database and allows tutors to print out the learners test

results

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 36: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|39 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE)

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The Course covers three units of work Performing Composing

and ListeningAppraising

Performing (30)

Students perform music throughout the course The two best

recordings of performances are used for the exam - one solo and

one ensemble (group) performance Performances can be of any

type style of music Each recording must be done inside a 10 hour

time limit but the piece can be re-recorded any number of times during

that period

For a Solo Students may submit an instrumental vocal performance an instrumental

vocal improvisation a sequenced performance (programmed into computer keyboard)

a live performance on DJ decksmusic technology etc

For an Ensemble piece Students may submit an un-doubled instrumental vocal an

improvisation within a group piece (eg Guitar solo in a rock piece) rehearsing directing

a group (Conducting skills) capturing and mixing a multi-track recording

Composing (30)

Students compose music throughout the course The two best compositions are used for the

exam Each composition must be completed within a 10 hour time limit Each piece must

come from a different Area of Study (see below) Instead of composing students are allowed

to submit Arrangements instead ndash they can use pre-existing music and re-create the material

to make a new piece out of the old one

ListeningAppraising (40)

Students sit a 1frac12 hour Listening Test This will feature eight compulsory questions based on a

series of Nine ldquoSet Musical Worksrdquo that are studied throughout the course There is one final

question which gives a choice of two options The questions are based on a CD of music

played in the exam hall

Composing and Listening work is based on the four ldquoAreas of Studyrdquo that underpin the exam

The areas of study make up 25 each of the GCSE course They are

Western Classical Music 1600-1899

Music in the 20th Century

Popular Music in Context

World Music

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 37: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

40|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

MUSIC (GCSE) continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Music lessons include performance practise composition exercises listening exercises amp teaching

research on the set works areas of study Music is both Practical and Academic

Although it is an advantage to already play a musical instrument and read music these skills are not

required to take the GCSE The GCSE is designed so that a student who has had regular music

classes in school with no extra lessons instrumental skills etc should be able to get at least a C

grade The use of ICT helps en-skill all students in their weaker areas

There‟s something in this GCSE to interest every taste in Music ndash some the students might like some

they might dislike but if they listen with open ears most of it should grow on them Music GCSE is

hard work but its good fun too

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

wwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09musicPagesdefaultaspx

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC

(EDEXCEL)

The Course covers two units of work ldquoWorking in the Music Industryrdquo and ldquoComputer Systems used

by Musiciansrdquo All students who opt for the Music GCSE course have the option to be entered for the

BTEC instead of or as well as the GCSE qualification There is no final exam in BTEC ndash the entire

assessment is coursework based

Working in the Music Industry (33 - Coursework)

Students are introduced to how the Music Industry works by learning about Organisations within the

Music Industry and Professional Roles within the Music Industry Each student then produces a

portfolio of evidence that demonstrates their knowledge of

A chosen Organisation researched in depth with a chart showing the way their Organisation links

with others

The Performer‟s role

Another role of their choice that relates supports the Performer

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 38: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|41 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 CERTIFICATE IN MUSIC continued

Exam Board EDEXCEL

Exploring Computer Systems used by Musicians (66 - Coursework)

Students will be familiar with using computers in Music lessons This unit of work gives students

the chance to find out more from how much things cost to health and safety when using the

equipment from what you need to build a recording studio to actually making their own

recordings The portfolio of evidence required for this unit of work involves

A description of all the equipment needed in a recording studio (hardware and software)

including costs

A users‟ guide showing how to connect all the equipment install the software and use it

safely

Recording one or two pieces of music showing the ability to use MIDI and Audio recording

techniques

Music lessons include showing the students how and where to research in order to find what

they need introducing students to technical information and practical skills demonstrating

various work related skills spending time developing the portfolio of evidence Music BTEC is

designed to teach students the skills and enable them to learn the knowledge required to

work in the Music Industry

This is as close as you can come to studying ldquoMusic Technologyrdquo at level two ldquoMusic

Technologyrdquo is the study and use of Recording Studio equipment and techniques Students will

spend time in the College Recording Studio and the PC suite getting to know the software

and hardware that real studio engineers will use in their day to day jobs

The BTEC course is taught alongside the GCSE course as many of the skills are needed for both

exams Therefore students who wish to work hard enough can be entered for both

qualifications preparing them for Music or Music Technology study at level 3 (6th form)

Alternatively students can focus on the more academic GCSE or the more vocational BTEC as

individual qualifications ndash learning the skills and acquiring useful knowledge but not necessarily

being assessed on everything at the end of the course

A pass grade at BTEC is worth the same as a C grade at GCSE with Merit and Distinction

grades matching the B and A as well Potentially by opting for Music GCSE you could end up

with two GCSE‟s worth of qualifications by the end of year 11

The syllabus and other supporting documents are available to download from

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsfirsts10musicPagesdefaultaspx

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 39: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

42|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

PHOTOGRAPHY (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

The course aims to express your knowledge and skills in photography techniques You will

learn to take photographs using digital cameras and manipulate them using computer

software

You will also learn how to develop black and white film and print black and white

photographs

Areas of study may include lens-based and light-based media including theme-based

photography (portrait landscape still-life reportage) documentary photography photo-

journalism narrative photography experimental imagery photographic installation new

media practice

Assessment

This is a two year course covering years 10 and 11 Work carried out in school and at home

is presented for assessment at the end of Year 11 which accounts for 60 of the marks

There is also an externally set task by the Exam board which carries the remaining 40 of the

marks

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 40: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|43 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

SPANISH (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

All students have the choice to continue

with Spanish which they have been

studying since Year 7 It would be a wise

choice to continue with Spanish as the

ability to speak a second language is not

only useful but is advantageous in

today‟s world Our closer connection

with Europe and the rise of truly international companies means that the ability to speak even

a modest amount of a second language is highly prized by many employers

Course Information

The course builds on knowledge and skills acquired in the lower school The syllabus is based

on real-life situations allowing natural progression in the acquisition of vocabulary and usage

Topics have relevance to holidays and the world of work The aim is to enable the student to

communicate and this involves listening speaking reading and writing with understanding

Topics covered are

Context 1 ldquoLifestylerdquo

Healthy choices relationships social issues family pets food and drink

Context 2 ldquoLeisurerdquo

Free time shopping money new technology sports media

Context 3 ldquoHome amp Environmentrdquo

Home local area and the environment

Context 4 ldquoWork amp Educationrdquo

School future plans pressures and problems current and future jobs

Controlled assessments consist of speaking and writing There are exams in reading and

listening at the end of Year 11

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 41: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

44|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

BTEC LEVEL 2 DIPLOMA IN SPORT

Exam Board EDEXCEL

The BTEC Level 2 Diploma extends the specialist work-related focus from the BTEC Level 2

Extended Certificate It is broadly equivalent to four GCSEs The course provides learners with

the opportunity to enter employment in the Sport and Leisure Sector or to progress to

vocational qualifications such as the Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications in Sport

The course also gives learners the opportunity to develop a

range of skills and techniques personal qualities and

attributes which are essential tools needed as students enter

the workplace

Students study all of the core PE units and additionally study

1 Exercise amp Fitness Instruction

The aim of this unit is to equip learners with the knowledge

and skills required to plan an exercise programme and assist in

instructing an exercise session This unit develop the planning

and thinking skills of students as well as their communication and practical skills

2 Planning and Leading Sports Activities

The aim of this unit is to give students an opportunity to inspire

motivate and improve the performance of a selected target

group through the delivery of a sporting activity and event It

encourages students to work in a team situation to organise

plan and run a successful event and enables students to feel a great achievement

3 Injury in Sport

The aim of this unit is to develop learner knowledge of common sports injuries and illnesses and

their respective treatment It will also consider risk assessment and its management This will

enable students to gain a greater understanding of First Aid as well as long term injuries

4 Technical Skills and Tactical Awareness for Sport

The unit allows students to take an in depth look at the technical skills and tactics needed in

the favourite sports This develops the understanding and final performance of students and

enables students to compare their skills with professional top sports people

(Units to be studied are subject to change)

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 42: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|45 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TEXTILES (GCSE)

Exam Board AQA

Course Information

During the GCSE students will be introduced to a variety of experiences exploring a range of

textiles mediums techniques and processes including both new and traditional methods The

students will follow a brief working in a sketchbook which covers one or more of the following

areas of study fashion or costume printed and dyed fabrics domestic textiles construction

applied textiles and embellished textiles

Assessment and Coursework Balance

In their first year the students will be required to produce two

extended projects as part of Units 1 and 2 - these projects will

follow themes such as organic form patterns and culture The

students will work from first hand observations collecting and

developing ideas from both a range of exciting starting points and

textiles based techniques From this research and developmental

stage students will design and produce a final piece

During the second year students will begin by completing an

extension of their last project from the first year (Unit 3) then an

externally set assignment The three units of coursework submitted

will account for 60 of the marks and the externally set assignment

will account for 40

The second year allows students to develop a distinctive individual

style as a textiles artist Students will be able to refine techniques they

learnt previously and work to briefs that allow them to develop a

more personal response to a theme

Visits

Students will be given the opportunity to visit museums to gather research from primary sources

such as artefacts historical and contemporary fashion During either the first or the second

year of the GCSE students will have the chance to work with a textiles artist who works within

the industry today

Why choose Textiles

Textiles is an exciting area of Art and Design to study It allows students who feel more

confident working with materials to gain a GCSE The College also runs a Textiles bdquoA‟ Level

course which is ideal for those students who are thinking of pursuing a career in art or textiles

The course is designed to allow students to develop as competent artists whilst gaining a range

of vocational skills which can be applied to a range of career paths such as fashion interior

design styling textiles design and costume design

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 43: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

46|Page KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

TRIPLE SCIENCE (SEPARATE GCSE SCIENCES)

Exam Board AQA

Triple Science GCSE is a combination of three GCSEs in Biology

Chemistry and Physics It provides a full coverage of these three

subjects at Key Stage 4 and leads to the award of three

separate GCSEs

What are the differences between Triple Science and other

science GCSEs

This course will be similar to the double award course in that modules of all three subjects will

be studied throughout Years 10 amp 11 However in addition to this a further module for each of

the separate sciences will be covered leading to a triple GCSE award

What are the advantages of studying Triple Science

The course covers a more extensive range of subject matter and provides the best entry into

bdquoA‟ level The Double Science route is also regarded as being an adequate preparation for

bdquoA‟ level but the step up is likely to present a greater degree of challenge

Who should consider taking Triple Science

Students who have achieved well in science and enjoy the subject are best placed to cope

with the demands of this course Any student seriously thinking about a career in science or a

related area should consider this option Due to the demands of the course only those

students gaining a Level 6 or higher in their science SATs will usually be accepted on to this

course

The extra teaching time needed for this GCSE will be after school

GCSE Biology GCSE Chemistry GCSE Physics

Module 1 25 Module 1 25 Module 1 25

Module 2 25 Module 2 25 Module 2 25

Module 3 25 Module 3 25 Module 3 25

Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25 Centre Assessment 25

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 44: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Page|47 KS4 Options Information 2012-2014

KS4 OPTION SUBJECTS

2012 - 2014

Please indicate 6 possible option subjects from the list below from which we will allocate 4

option subjects

Please note

We hope to run all courses but they can only run if there are viable numbers opting for them If

through lack of numbers or if there are too many students opting for a course which we

cannot staff we will advise you of the problem and help you choose an alternative course

Options Information Evening Thursday 15th March 2012

Deadline for Submission of Option Form Wednesday 28th March 2012

Make a record of your choice on the table below before

handing in your Options Form it will be given to you on the

Options Information Evening

SUBJECT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mo

st

De

sire

d

3D Design

Art

Catering

Construction

Dance

Drama

Ethics

Film Studies

French

Geography

Graphics

Hairdressing

History

ICT

Media Studies

Motor Vehicle

Music

Spanish

(Diploma) Sport

Textiles

Triple Sciences

Please tick if you would like to be

considered to do EBacc Please

remember that you need to

include Geography or History and

French or Spanish as your subject

options

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk

Page 45: KS4 Options Information - Chessington Community · PDF fileKS4 Options Information 2012-2014 ... BTEC LEVEL 2 EXTENDED CERTIFICATE IN APPLIED SCIENCE ... any student who secures a

Chessington Community College

Garrison Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 2JS

Phone (020) 8974 1156 Fax (020) 8974 2603

wwwchessingtoncommunitycollegecouk